Toyota 2009 Tundra Owners Manual
2015-09-07
: Toyota Toyota-2009-Tundra-Owners-Manual-763180 toyota-2009-tundra-owners-manual-763180 toyota pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 695
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
412xxxM1.qxd 7/16/08 4:20 PM Page 1 2009 Quick Reference Guide 412xxxM1.qxd 7/16/08 4:20 PM Page 2 2009 Tundra This Quick Reference Guide is a summary of basic vehicle operations. It contains brief descriptions of fundamental operations so you can locate and use the vehicle’s main equipment quickly and easily. The Quick Reference Guide is not intended as a substitute for the Owner’s Manual located in your vehicle’s glove box. We strongly encourage you to review the Owner’s Manual and supplementary manuals so you will have a better understanding of your vehicle’s capabilities and limitations. Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years of satisfied driving in your new Tundra. ! A word about safe vehicle operations This Quick Reference Guide is not a full description of Tundra operations. Every Tundra owner should review the Owner’s Manual that accompanies this vehicle. Pay special attention to the boxed information highlighted in color throughout the Owner’s Manual. Each box contains safe operating instructions to help you avoid injury or equipment malfunction. All information in this Quick Reference Guide is current at the time of printing. Toyota reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice. 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 1 2009 Tundra Quick Reference Guide FEATURES/OPERATIONS Accessory meter Air Conditioning/Heating Audio Automatic Transmission Bottle holders Cruise control Cup holders Door locks Four-wheel drive Garage door opener (HomeLink®)3 Lights1 & turn signals Mirrors-Power side view Moonroof Multi-information display2 Parking brake Power outlets-12V DC Power outlets-115V AC Rear seat entertainment system Seat adjustments-Front Seat adjustments-Rear Seat heaters Seats-Folding Seats-Head restraints EMERGENCY FEATURES 25 20-21 22-23 9 26 25 27 10 10 21 16 10 12 18 18 17 17 24 12-13 13 19 14-15 14 Telephone controls (Bluetooth®) 26 Tilt and telescopic steering wheel “TOW/HAUL” switch VSC OFF button Window-Rear Windows-Power Windshield wipers & washers 11 11 24 19 19 15 Doors-Child safety locks Seat belts Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor Spare tire & tools Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System 29 28 28 29 28 2 Visit your Toyota dealer for information on customizing this feature. Programmable by customer. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for instructions and more information. 3 HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. 1 1 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES SAFETY AND 8 7 7 4-5 4 2-3 6 6 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Engine maintenance Fuel tank door release and cap Hood release Indicator symbols Instrument cluster Instrument panel Keyless entry1 Light control-Instrument panel OVERVIEW OVERVIEW 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 2 OVERVIEW Instrument panel Steering wheel controls (if equipped) Steering wheel audio controls1 Telephone controls1 Voice command button1,2 Headlight and turn signal controls Engine switch 115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch1 VSC OFF button Power back window switch1 Emergency flasher button Multi-information display/Accessory meter control buttons1 Intuitive parking assist button1 Wiper and washer controls Accessory meter1 Theft deterrent system/Engine immobilizer indicator1 Intuitive parking assist indicator1 Audio system or navigation system-integrated audio system2 Outside rearview mirror/Back window defogger button1 Front passenger seat belt reminder Front passenger occupant classification indicator or front passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator1 2 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 3 Bench seat with manual Air Conditioning System OVERVIEW Separate seat with manual Air Conditioning system FEATURES/OPERATIONS 1 2 If equipped For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual.” 3 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES Seat heater controls1 Front passenger airbag manual ON/OFF switch1 (in glove box) Air Conditioning controls 12V DC Power outlet AUX audio jack Cigarette lighter “TOW/HAUL” button1 Two-wheel/Four-wheel drive selector1 Cruise control1 Tire Pressure Warning System reset Interior light/Personal light main switch Instrument panel light control “RSCA OFF” switch Cargo lamp switch Power rearview mirror control1 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 4 OVERVIEW Instrument cluster Without multi-information display With multi-information display Tachometer Service indicator and reminder Speedometer Fuel gauge Voltmeter Oil pressure gauge Engine coolant temperature Trip meter reset knob Odometer and two trip meters Multi-information display Automatic Transmission shift position indicator Automatic Transmission shift range display Automatic Transmission fluid temperature gauge Indicator symbols For details, refer to indicators and warning lights,” Section 2-2, 2009 Owner’s Manual. Brake system warning1 Driver/Front passenger seat belt reminder (alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph) 4 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 5 Charging system warning1 Low engine oil pressure warning1 OVERVIEW Front passenger occupant classification or front passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator1 Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1 Engine oil replacement reminder1 Low fuel level warning Open door warning Airbag SRS warning1 Master warning Automatic Transmission fluid temperature warning1 Low windshield washer fluid level warning Theft deterrent/Engine immobilizer system indicator Roll Sensing Curtain Airbags OFF indicator1 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Low Tire Pressure Warning1 Headlight low/high beam indicator Turn signal indicator High/Low speed four-wheel drive indicator Slip indicator1 Vehicle Stability Control OFF indicator/warning1 “AUTO LSD” indicator1 Cruise control indicator Anti-lock Brake System warning1 1 If indicator does not turn off within a few seconds of starting engine, there may be a malfunction. Have vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. 5 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES TOW/HAUL mode indicator 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 6 OVERVIEW Keyless entry Locking operation Push Unlocking operation Push ONCE: Driver door TWICE: All doors NOTE: If a door is not opened within 30 seconds of unlocking, all doors will relock for safety. Panic button Push and hold Light control-Instrument panel + Brightness control 6 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 7 Fuel tank door release and cap OVERVIEW Turn Pull Store NOTE: Tighten until one click is heard. If the cap is not tightened enough, Check Engine “ ” indicator may illuminate. FEATURES/OPERATIONS Hood release Pull SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES Pull up latch and raise hood 7 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 8 OVERVIEW Engine maintenance 6 cylinder (1GR-FE) engine 4.7L 8 cylinder (2UZ-FE) engine 5.7L 8 cylinder (3UR-FE/3UR-FBE) engine Windshield washer fluid tank Engine oil level dipstick Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil filler cap Power steering fluid reservoir Note: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including oil changes, will help extend the life of your vehicle and maintain performance. Please refer to the “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet,” “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement.” 8 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 9 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Automatic Transmission Floor shift type OVERVIEW Park* Reverse Neutral Drive “S” mode “S” “D” Column shift type + (“S” mode) Reverse Neutral - (“S” mode) Drive “S” mode FEATURES/OPERATIONS Park* * The engine switch must be set at “ON” and the brake pedal depressed to shift from Park. “S” (Sequential) mode Shift the shift lever to “S” position from “D” position. Column shift type: +: Upshift (turn up and release) -: Downshift (turn down and release) Downshifting increases power going uphill, or provides engine braking downhill. For best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, always drive with the shift lever in the “D” position. 9 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES Floor shift type: +: Upshift (push and release) -: Downshift (pull and release) 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 10 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Four-wheel drive (if equipped) Turn Turn Push and turn WD High speed (2WD) High speed (4WD) Turn to “4H” with speed below 62 mph. Low speed (4WD) Shift to “N” position when stopped, then push and turn to “4L.” For best fuel economy and performance under normal driving conditions, keep in “2WD” position. Mirrors-Power side view (if equipped) Fold mirrors in Select left or right Return mirrors to original position Adjust Key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Door locks (if equipped) Unlock Lock 10 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 11 Tilt and telescopic (if equipped) steering wheel Tilt steering wheel Angle Tilt and telescopic steering wheel Angle OVERVIEW Manual Length Lock release lever Lock release lever Hold wheel, push lever down, set angle and length, and return lever. Power Up Angle Length FEATURES/OPERATIONS Away from the driver Toward the driver Control switch Down Push the control switch, set angle and length. Note: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle is in motion. “TOW/HAUL” switch (if equipped) Floor shift type Column shift type System ON/OFF Tow/Haul mode can be used when carrying heavy loads. As fuel economy is reduced while in Tow/Haul mode, deactivating when driving without a load is recommended. Refer to the Owner‘s Manual for more details on this system before attempting to use it. 11 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES System ON/OFF 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 12 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Moonroof (if equipped) Sliding operation Tilting operation Open Close Close Tilt Push once to open/close completely. To stop partway, press the switch lightly. Seat adjustments-Front Manual seat Separate seat -Regular cab model Separate seat -Double cab and CrewMax models Bench seat * * * Double cab and CrewMax models only 12 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 13 Power seat OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS Position Seatback angle Seat cushion angle Seat height Lumbar support (if equipped) Seatback angle (side) Seatback angle (center) Leg support Position, cushion angle and height Seat adjustments-Rear (CrewMax models) SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES Position Seatback angle and fold 13 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 14 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Seats-Head restraints Front-Separate seat (type B) Front-Separate seat (type A) (2) (1) Lock release button Lock release button Front-Bench seat Lock release button Rear (CrewMax model) Rear (double cab model) Lock release button Lock release button Seats-Folding Front (regular cab model) (2) Pull (1) Pull 14 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 15 Rear (double cab model) OVERVIEW (2) (1) Stow Pull (3) Lift up Rear (CrewMax model) (2) (1) Stow (3) Pull and fold down Adjust interval* Single wipe Pull to wash and wipe FEATURES/OPERATIONS Windshield wipers & washers With intermittent wiper Interval wipe Slow Fast * Intermittent windshield wiper interval adjustment Rotate to increase/decrease wipe frequency. Without intermittent wiper Pull to wash and wipe Slow Fast 15 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES Single wipe 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 16 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Lights & turn signals Headlights Auto Headlights Parking lights High beam Low beam High beam flasher -Daytime Running Light system (DRL) Automatically turns on the turn signal lights at a reduced intensity. -Automatic light cut off system Automatically turns lights off after a delay of 30 seconds, or the lock switch on remote may be pushed after locking. Front fog lights (if equipped) Turn Front fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam. Turn signals Right turn Lane change Lane change Left turn 16 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 17 Power outlets-12V DC (if equipped) Separate seats Inside of the center console box Back of the center console box Back of the center console box (CrewMax model) Instrument panel Under the seat cushion of the front center seat Back of the front center seat Back of the front center seat (CrewMax model) Power outlets-115V AC (if equipped) ON/OFF switch Back of the center console box Push 17 Back of the front center seat SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES Key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position to be used. FEATURES/OPERATIONS Bench seat OVERVIEW Instrument panel 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 18 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Multi-information display (if equipped) Push “INFO” to change information in the following: (1) Zoom display of odometer and trip meter (2) Average gas mileage (3) Current gas mileage (4) Miles left on remaining fuel (5) Running time from engine start (6) Average vehicle speed Push “SETUP US/M” to customize to the following settings: (1) UNIT (US/M) (2) KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK (3) KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER (4) KEYLESS ENTRY ALL DOORS UNLOCK (5) DOOR AUTO LOCKING (6) DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING (7) HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER (8) COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER (9) DEFAULT SETTING Parking brake Set: Depress Release: Depress again 18 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 19 Windows-Power (if equipped) Regular cab model Window lock switch Up Down OVERVIEW Driver side Automatic down operation (driver side only) Push the switch completely down and release to fully open. To stop window midway, lightly pull up on the switch. Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger windows. Driver’s window remains operable. FEATURES/OPERATIONS Window-Rear CrewMax model Open Close Seat heaters (if equipped) Driver seat Front passenger seat SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES 19 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 20 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Air Conditioning/Heating Automatic Air Conditioning Fan speed Automatic climate control ON Adjusting the temperature setting will cause the airflow vents, air intake and fan to adjust automatically. Air Conditioning ON/OFF Temperature selector (driver side) Windshield defogger (fresh air only) Airflow vent In “ ” mode, use fresh air (“ ” indicator “OFF”) to reduce window fogging. Temperature selector (front passenger side) “DUAL” button Indicator ON: Separate temperature settings for driver and passenger. Indicator OFF: Synchronize temperature settings for driver and passenger. Outside rearview mirror/Back window defogger Fresh or recirculated cabin air Climate control OFF 20 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 21 Manual Air Conditioning OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS Fan speed Air Conditioning ON/OFF Fresh or recirculated cabin air Outside rearview mirror/Back window defogger (if equipped) Temperature selector (front passenger side) Synchronize with driver side temperature setting Airflow vent selector In “ ” or “ ” mode, use fresh air (“ ” indicator “OFF”) to reduce window fogging. Temperature selector (driver side) Select for maximum cooling. Air intake will automatically be set to recirculate. It is not possible to change intake to fresh, or to turn A/C OFF in this mode. Garage door opener (HomeLink®)* (if equipped) Refer to “Garage door opener,” Section 3-7 in the Owner’s Manual for more details. For programming assistance, contact the Toyota Customer Experience Center at 1-800-331-4331, or visit http://www.homelink.com. * HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. 21 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES Garage door openers manufactured under license from HomeLink®* can be programmed to operate garage doors, estate gates, security lighting, etc. 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 22 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Audio Type 1 Preset buttons - functions in other modes indicated above number Push to turn ON/OFF Eject CD Seek station/ CD track select Push to skip up/down MP3 folder Push to adjust tone, balance & ASL* Mode Type 2 additional functions Station/CD track scan View CD information Load CD(s) View MP3 folder and/or Satellite Radio category type Type 3 (with JBL speakers) * Automatic Sound Leveling CD PLAYER To scan tracks on a disc Push and hold “SCAN.” Push again to hold selection. CD changer (Types 2 and 3 only) -To load one disc Push “LOAD” and insert one disc. -To load multiple discs Push and hold “LOAD” until you hear a beep. Insert one disc. Shutter will close and then re-open for next disc. To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Turn “TUNE.FILE.” To select a folder (MP3/WMA only) Push either side of “FOLDER.” 22 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 23 RADIO OVERVIEW To preset stations Tune in the desired station and hold down a preset button (1-6) until you hear a beep. Push desired preset button (1-6) to select. To scan stations Push and hold “SCAN” to scan preset stations. Push again to hold selection. Steering wheel switches (if equipped) Volume control > > FEATURES/OPERATIONS “ ” -In radio mode Push to select a preset station; push and hold to seek the next strong station. -In CD mode Push to skip up or down to the next/previous track. “MODE” Push to turn audio ON and select an audio mode. Push and hold to turn audio system OFF. AUX audio jack By inserting a mini plug into the AUX audio jack, you can listen to music from a portable audio device through the vehicle’s speaker system while in AUX mode. 23 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES Push 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 24 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Rear seat entertainment system (if equipped) Separate seats Bench seat 115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch Front audio system DVD player DVD screen Remote control 115V AC Power outlet A/V input adapter VSC OFF button VSC OFF button The VSC OFF button is used to switch between modes related to the TRAC, VSC and Auto LSD functions. Refer to Section 2-4 of the Owner’s Manual for more information. 24 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 25 Accessory meter (if equipped) OVERVIEW Refer to your Owner’s Manual for complete details on this system before attempting to use it. Cruise control (if equipped) FEATURES/OPERATIONS Outside temperature/Cruise information display Clock Hour set Minute set Change information (if equipped) “SELECT RESET” button (if equipped) “SETUP US/M” button (if equipped) to customize unit Turning system ON/OFF System ON/OFF Increase speed Resume2 Cancel1 Decrease speed 1 2 Set The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing the brake pedal. The set speed may be resumed once vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph. 25 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES Functions 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 26 FEATURES/OPERATIONS Telephone controls (Bluetooth®) (if equipped) Audio unit Microphone Steering wheel telephone switches Volume Voice command button End call Start call Bluetooth® technology allows dialing or receipt of calls without taking hands from the steering wheel or using a cable to connect the telephone and the system. Refer to “Hands-free telephone system,” Section 1-8 in the Owner’s Manual for more details. Bottle holders Instrument panel Front door Rear door Rear door (CrewMax model) 26 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 27 Cup holders Separate seat Bench seat Back of the center console box (double cab model) Back of the front center seatback (double cab model) FEATURES/OPERATIONS Front center seat OVERVIEW Center console Rear seat CrewMax model SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES 27 412xxxM2.qxd 7/16/08 4:22 PM Page 28 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES Seat belts Take up slack Too high Ta b Keep as low on hips as possible B u c k le If belt is fully extended, then retracted even slightly, it cannot be re-extended beyond that point, unless fully retracted again. This feature is used to help hold child restraint systems securely. To find more information about seat belts, and how to install a child restraint system, refer to the Owner's Manual. Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor (CrewMax and double cab models) Push up, or squeeze lock release to lower Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System System reset initialization 1. Push and hold “ SET” button until the indicator blinks three times. 2. Wait several minutes to allow initialization to complete. After adjusting tire pressures, or after tires have been rotated or replaced, turn the ignition switch to “ON” and press and hold the “ SET” button until indicator blinks three times. Let the vehicle sit for a few minutes to allow initialization to complete. Refer to the load label on the door jamb or the Owner’s Manual for tire inflation specifications. If the tire pressure indicator flashes for more than 60 seconds and then remains on, take the vehicle to your local Toyota dealer. Note: The warning light may come on due to temperature changes or changes in tire pressure from natural air leakage. If the system has not been initialized recently, setting the tire pressures to factory specifications should turn off the light. 28 412xxxM1.qxd 7/16/08 4:20 PM Page 3 Doors-Child safety locks (CrewMax and double cab models) OVERVIEW Rear door Moving the lever to “LOCK” will allow the door to be opened only from the outside. Spare tire & tools Tool location Regular cab models -behind the right seatback CrewMax models -behind the right rear seatback Tool bag Tool bag Jack Double cab models -under the right rear seats with storage box Double cab models -under the right rear seats without storage box Tool bag FEATURES/OPERATIONS Jack Tool bag Jack Jack Removing the spare tire (2) (1) (1) Assemble the jack handle. (2) Insert the jack handle end into the lowering screw. (3) Turn the jack handle counterclockwise. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and jack positioning procedures. 29 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES (3) 412xxxM1.qxd 7/16/08 4:21 PM Page 4 MN 00505-QRG09-TUN Printed in the USA 7/08 Abbreviation list Abbreviation/Acronym list ABBREVIATIONS 2WD Two Wheel Drive 4WD Four Wheel Drive ABS Anti-Lock Brake System ACC Accessory AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence shifting ALR Automatic Locking Retractor A-TRAC AUTO LSD Active Traction Control Automatic Limited Slip Differential CAL Calibration CRS Child Restraint System ECU Electronic Control Unit EDR Event Data Recorder ELR Emergency Locking Retractor FFV Flexible Fuel Vehicle GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating I/M INFO LATCH LED LT 654 MEANING Emission inspection and maintenance Information Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children Light Emitting Diode Light truck M+S Mud + Snow MMT Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether OBD On Board Diagnostics PWR Power ABBREVIATIONS RES RSCA MEANING Resume Roll Sensing of Curtain shield Airbags SRS Supplemental Restraint System TIN Tire Identification Number TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System TRAC Traction Control TWI US/M Treadwear indicators U.S. Customary System and metric VIN Vehicle Identification Number VSC Vehicle Stability Control 655 For your information Main Owners Manual Please note that this manual applies to all models explains and all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment. Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty. Installation of a mobile two-way radio system As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation. 36 Scrapping your Toyota The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle. Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries. CAUTION n General precautions while driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others. 37 CAUTION n General precaution regarding children’s safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. 38 Symbols used throughout this manual Cautions & Notices CAUTION This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others. NOTICE This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its equipment. Symbols used in illustrations Safety symbol The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”. Arrows indicating operations Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens). 39 40 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column. 2 When driving Driving, stopping, and safe-driving information. 3 Interior and exterior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience. 4 Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information. 5 When trouble arises What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident. 6 Vehicle specifications Detailed vehicle information. 7 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, seat belt instructions for Canadian owners and camper information. Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual. 1 Pictorial index Exterior Regular Cab models Outside rear view mirrors P. 88 Windshield wipers P. 211 Hood P. 475 Front turn signal/parking lights P. 185, 207 Front side marker lights P. 207 Headlight high beam P. 207 Headlight low beam P. 207 Front fog lights∗ P. 210 8 Back window∗ Cargo lamps P. 397 P. 96 Stop/tail and rear side marker lights P. 207 Rear turn signal lights P. 185 Side doors P. 47 Fuel filler door P. 103 Tailgate P. 52 License plate lights P. 207 Tires P. 494 l Rotation P. 558 l Replacement l Inflation pressure P. 501, 615 P. 622 l Information ∗: If equipped 9 Pictorial index Exterior Double Cab models Outside rear view mirrors P. 88 Windshield wipers P. 211 Hood P. 475 Front turn signal/ parking lights P. 185, 207 Headlight high beam P. 207 Front side marker lights P. 207 Headlight low beam P. 207 Front fog lights∗ P. 210 10 Back window∗ P. 96 Cargo lamps P. 397 Stop/tail and rear side marker lights P. 207 Fuel filler door P. 103 Rear turn signal lights P. 185 Side doors P. 47 Tires P. 494 l Rotation P. 558 l Replacement P. 501, 615 l Inflation pressure P. 622 l Information Tailgate P. 52 License plate lights P. 207 ∗: If equipped 11 Pictorial index Exterior CrewMax models Moon roof∗ P. 99 Outside rear view mirrors P. 88 Windshield wipers P. 211 Hood P. 475 Front turn signal/ parking lights P. 185, 207 Headlight high beam P. 207 Front side marker lights P. 207 Headlight low beam P. 207 Front fog lights∗ P. 210 12 Power back window Cargo lamps P. 397 Fuel filler door P. 103 Side doors P. 47 Tires P. 494 l Rotation P. 558 l Replacement P. 501, 615 l Inflation pressure P. 622 l Information P. 97 Stop/tail and rear side marker lights P. 207 Rear turn signal lights P. 185 Tailgate P. 52 License plate lights P. 207 ∗: If equipped 13 Pictorial index Interior Front separated type seats Seat belts P. 75 Console box P. 401 Head restraints P. 71 Horn P. 187 Bottle holders P. 417 SRS driver airbag P. 115 SRS front passenger airbag P. 115 Glove boxes P. 400 Armrest∗2 P. 444 Floor mats P. 446 Rear cup holders∗ 2 Front seats P. 416 SRS side airbags P. 115 Rear seats∗1 14 P. 63 P. 58 Type A Personal/interior lights P. 395 SRS curtain shield airbags P. 115 Personal light∗2/ interior light∗5 P. 395 Moon roof switches∗4 Rear seat entertainment system∗4 P. 329 Overhead console P. 99 P. 413 Sun visors P. 424 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 85 Compass∗3 P. 455 Garage door opener switches∗3 P. 450 Vanity mirrors∗1 P. 425 ∗1: Double Cab and CrewMax models ∗4: If equipped on CrewMax models ∗5: Double Cab models ∗2: CrewMax models 3 ∗ : If equipped 15 Pictorial index Interior Type B (If equipped on Double Cab and CrewMax models) SRS curtain shield airbags P. 115 Personal/interior lights P. 395 Personal light∗3 P. 395 Rear seat entertainment system∗2 P. 329 Overhead console P. 413 Sun visors P. 424 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror Compass∗ 1 P. 85 P. 455 Garage door opener switches∗1 P. 450 Vanity mirrors P. 425 16 Inside door lock button P. 48 Power window switches P. 94 Door lock switch P. 48 Auxiliary box P. 419 Driving position memory switches∗4 P. 68 Window lock switch P. 95 ∗3: CrewMax models ∗1: If equipped 2 ∗ : If equipped on CrewMax models ∗4: If equipped on Double Cab and CrewMax models 17 Pictorial index Interior Front cup holders P. 414 Ashtray P. 429 Shift lever P. 180 Map holder P. 406 Shift lock override button P. 577 18 Double Cab models Rear cup holders P. 416 Power outlet P. 432 CrewMax models A/V input adapter∗ P. 350 Power outlet (12V DC) P. 432 Power outlet (115V AC)∗ P. 437 ∗: If equipped 19 Pictorial index Interior Front bench type seat Seat belts P. 75 Head restraints P. 71 Horn P. 187 Bottle holders P. 417 SRS driver airbag P. 115 SRS front passenger airbag P. 115 Glove boxes P. 400 Armrest∗3 P. 444 Floor mats P. 446 Rear cup holders∗ 3 Front seats P. 416 SRS side airbags P. 115 Rear seats∗ 2 20 P. 63 P. 58 Type A Personal/interior lights P. 395 SRS curtain shield airbags P. 115 Personal light∗3/ interior light∗5 P. 395 Moon roof switches∗4 Rear seat entertainment system∗4 P. 329 Overhead console P. 99 P. 413 Sun visors P. 424 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 85 Compass∗1 P. 455 Garage door opener switches∗1 P. 450 Vanity mirrors∗2 P. 425 ∗1: If equipped ∗2: Double Cab and CrewMax models ∗3: CrewMax models ∗4: If equipped on CrewMax models ∗5: Double Cab models 21 Pictorial index Interior Type B (If equipped on Double Cab and CrewMax models) SRS curtain shield airbags P. 115 Personal light∗3 P. 395 Personal/interior lights P. 395 Rear seat entertainment system∗2 P. 329 Overhead console P. 413 Sun visors P. 424 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 85 Compass∗1 P. 455 Garage door opener switches∗1 P. 450 Vanity mirrors P. 425 22 Inside door lock button P. 48 Power window switches∗1 P. 94 Door lock switch∗1 P. 48 Auxiliary box∗1 P. 419 Window lock switch∗1 P. 95 ∗3: CrewMax models ∗1: If equipped 2 ∗ : If equipped on CrewMax models 23 Pictorial index Interior Shift lever P. 180 Shift lock override button P. 577 TOW HAUL switch∗ P. 183 24 Pen holder P. 409 Front cup holders P. 414 Auxiliary box P. 419 Auxiliary box P. 419 ∗: If equipped 25 Pictorial index Interior Double Cab models Power outlet P. 432 Rear cup holders P. 416 26 CrewMax models Power outlet (12V DC) P. 432 Power outlet (115V AC)∗ P. 437 A/V input adapter∗ P. 350 ∗: If equipped 27 Pictorial index Instrument panel Headlight switch P. 207 Turn signal lever P. 185 Fog light switch∗1 P. 210 Gauges and meters P. 188 Windshield wipers and washer switch P. 211 Passenger airbag off switch∗2 P. 127 Tire pressure warning reset switch P. 495 Parking brake pedal P. 186 Hood lock release lever P. 475 28 Vehicles with manual air conditioning system (front separated type seats) Outside rear view mirror defogger switch∗3/ outside rear view mirror defogger and front windshield wiper de-icer switch∗3 P. 293 Back window defogger switch∗4/ back window defogger and outside rear view mirror defogger switch∗5/ back window defogger, outside rear view mirror defogger and front windshield wiper de-icer switch∗5 P. 295 Accessory meter P. 204 Security indicator∗1 P. 108, 110 Audio system P. 298 Navigation system* Air conditioning system P. 285 AUX adapter Power outlet P. 432 P. 325 Cigarette lighter P. 431 *: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” ∗3: If equipped on Regular Cab and Double Cab models ∗1: If equipped ∗4: CrewMax models 2 ∗ : Regular Cab models ∗5: If equipped on CrewMax models 29 Pictorial index Instrument panel Vehicles with manual air conditioning system (front bench type seat) Outside rear view mirror defogger switch∗2/ outside rear view mirror defogger and front windshield wiper de-icer switch∗2 P. 293 Back window defogger switch∗3/ back window defogger and outside rear view mirror defogger switch∗4/ back window defogger, outside rear view mirror defogger and front windshield wiper de-icer switch∗4 P. 295 Accessory meter P. 204 Security indicator∗1 P. 108, 110 Audio system P. 298 Navigation system* Air conditioning system P. 285 AUX adapter P. 325 30 Bottle holders P. 417 Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system Outside rear view mirror defogger switch∗5/ outside rear view mirror defogger and front windshield wiper de-icer switch∗6 P. 293 Back window defogger and outside rear view mirror defogger switch∗3/ back window defogger, outside rear view mirror defogger and front windshield wiper de-icer switch∗4 P. 295 Accessory meter P. 204 Security indicator P. 108, 110 Audio system P. 298 Navigation system* Air conditioning system P. 276 Seat heater switches P. 442 AUX adapter Power outlet P. 432 P. 325 Cigarette lighter P. 431 *: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” ∗34: CrewMax models ∗ : If equipped on CrewMax models ∗12: If equipped ∗ : If equipped on Regular Cab and Double Cab ∗56: Double Cab models ∗ : If equipped on Double Cab models models 31 Pictorial index Instrument panel Front separated type seats Emergency flasher switch P. 534 Accessory meter control switches∗1 P. 204 Intuitive parking assist switch∗1 P. 217 Front wheel drive control switch∗3 P. 223 TOW/HAUL switch∗1 P. 183 32 Multi-information display control switches∗2 P. 198 Front bench type seat Emergency flasher switch P. 534 Intuitive parking assist switch∗1 P. 217 Accessory meter control switches∗1 P. 204 Front wheel drive control switch∗3 P. 223 Ashtray P. 429 Power outlet P. 432 Cigarette lighter P. 431 ∗1: If equipped ∗3: 4WD models 2 ∗ : Vehicles with multi-information display 33 Pictorial index Instrument panel Power outlet main switch∗1 P. 437 VSC OFF switch P. 227, 232, 233 Engine (ignition) switch P. 177 Power back window switch∗2 P. 97 Audio remote control switches∗1 P. 327 Telephone switches∗1 P. 364 34 Talk switch∗1 P. 364 Cruise control switch∗1 P. 214 Personal/interior light main switch P. 394 Instrument panel light control dial P. 193 Outside rear view mirror switches∗1 P. 88 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch∗5 P. 84 Tilt steering lock release lever∗3/ tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever∗4 P. 83 Cargo lamp main switch P. 397 RSCA OFF switch P. 129 ∗1: If equipped ∗2: CrewMax models ∗3: Front bench type seat ∗4: Vehicles without driving position memory ∗ (front separated type seats) 5 : Vehicles with driving position memory 35 1-1. Key information Keys The following keys are provided with the vehicle. Vehicles without engine immobilizer system Master keys Valet key Key number plate Vehicles with engine immobilizer system Master keys Valet key Key number plate n When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (→P. 400) Carry the master key for your own use and leave the valet key only with the attendant. n Key number plate Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using the key number plate. (→P. 580) 42 1-1. Key information NOTICE n To prevent key damage (vehicles with engine immobilizer system) l Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet. 43 Before driving l Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface. 1 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Wireless remote control (if equipped) The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle from outside the vehicle. Locks all doors Unlocks all doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors. Pushing and Sounds alarm holding: n Operation signals A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice) n Panic mode When is pushed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control. n Door lock buzzer If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more. n Wireless remote control battery depletion The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if the wireless remote control is not used.) If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 510) 44 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors n If the wireless remote control does not operate Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the key. (→P. 47) n Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. 1 n Alarm (if equipped) n Conditions affecting operation The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations. l Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves l When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication device l When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity l When the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by a metallic object l When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby l When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a personal computer n Customization l That can be configured at Toyota dealer (vehicles without multi-information display) Settings (e.g. wireless remote control) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 633) l It is possible to change the settings (vehicles with multi-information display) (Feature customization →P. 200) 45 Before driving Using the wireless remote control to lock the door will set the alarm system. (→P. 110) 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors n Certification for wireless remote control For vehicles sold in U.S.A. NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 46 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Side doors The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the wireless remote control, key or door lock switch. n Wireless remote control (if equipped) 1 →P. 44 Before driving n Key Vehicles without power door lock system Locks the door Unlocks the door Vehicles with power door lock system Locks all doors Unlocks all doors Turning the key a single time in the driver’s door unlocks the driver’s door, and turning the key again unlocks the other doors. Vehicles with moon roof Closes the moon roof (turn and hold) Opens the moon roof (turn and hold) 47 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors n Door lock switch (if equipped) Driver’s door lock switch Locks all doors Unlocks all doors Passenger’s door lock switch Locks all doors Unlocks all doors n Inside lock button Locks the door Unlocks the door Pulling the door handle can open the front door even if the lock button is in the lock position. 48 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Locking the front doors from the outside without a key Move the inside door lock button to the lock position. Close the door. 1 Vehicles with power door lock system Rear door child-protector lock (Double Cab and CrewMax models) The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors. Automatic door locking and unlocking systems (vehicles with power door lock system) n Automatic door locking and unlocking functions l Locking function: All doors are automatically locked when the vehicle speed goes above about 12 mph (20 km/h). l Unlocking function: All doors are automatically unlocked when the shift lever is moved to the P position with the engine started. 49 Before driving The door cannot be locked if a front door is open and the key is in the engine switch. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors n The following functions can be set or cancelled: Function Operation Shift position linked door locking function Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors. Shift position linked door unlocking function Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors. Speed linked door locking function All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher. Driver’s door linked door unlocking function All doors are unlocked when the driver’s door is opened within 10 seconds after turning the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position. n Setting and canceling the functions Vehicles with multi-information display →P. 200 Vehicles without multi-information display To switch between setting and canceling, contact your Toyota dealer. n When locking the doors using the key (vehicles with power door lock system) The door cannot be locked if the key is in the engine switch. n Key reminder buzzer A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in the ACC or LOCK position to remind you to remove the key. n Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. door lock) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 633) 50 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors CAUTION n To prevent an accident Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury. Before driving l Always use a seat belt. 1 l Always lock the doors. l Ensure that all doors are properly closed. l Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving. l Double Cab and CrewMax models: Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats. 51 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Tailgate The tailgate can be opened using the tailgate handle. The tailgate can be locked/unlocked using a key. n Tailgate handle Pull the handle Open the tailgate slowly The support cables will hold the tailgate horizontal. After closing the tailgate, try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely locked. n Key Unlock with the master key Lock with the master key 52 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Removing the tailgate n Before removing the tailgate (vehicles with rear view monitor system) Connector cover (Gray) Connector cover (White) Store the connector covers in the glove box in a plastic bag when not using. To disconnect the wire harness connectors ( and ), press and hold the lock of the tailgate wire harness connector (White) and pull apart. Tailgate wire harness connector (White) Frame wire harness connector (Gray) Attach the connector cover (White) to the frame wire harness connector (Gray). Connector cover (White) Frame wire harness connector (Gray) 53 1 Before driving These connector covers are used when removing the tailgate, to prevent the back-up camera wire harness connectors from being contaminated. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Open the tailgate. Pull out the plastic wire protector located in the vehicle bed by pressing the tabs and pulling the protector. Plastic wire protector Pull out the wire harness from the vehicle bed. Attach the connector cover (Gray) to the tailgate wire harness connector (White). Tailgate wire harness connector (White) Connector cover (Gray) 54 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors n Removing the tailgate To unhook the support cable bracket, keep pulling up the clip on the bracket and unhook the bracket. Support cable bracket Clip Tilt the tailgate to about 45° from vertical and pull up the right side of the tailgate to unhook the right side. Slide the tailgate a little to the right to unhook the left side. To attach the tailgate, follow the removal procedure in reverse order. 55 1 Before driving Open the tailgate to the angle where you can release the brackets on the support cables from the lugs on both sides. Lift the support cable bracket up and slide it off. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Rear step bumper Type A For rear end protection and easier step-up loading. To get on the rear step bumper, use the shaded area in the illustration. Type B CAUTION n Before removing the tailgate (vehicles with rear view monitor system) Disconnect the wire harness between the back-up camera and the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in serious personal injury or damage to the vehicle components. n Caution while driving Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious personal injury. l Do not drive with the tailgate open. l Do not get on the rear step bumper. 56 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors NOTICE n To prevent damage to the tailgate wire harness (vehicles with rear view monitor system) 1 Do not pull out all of the tailgate wire harness before open the tailgate. Store the removed tailgate with the back-up camera lens facing upward. n After closing the tailgate Try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely locked. n To prevent damage to the rear step bumper Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step bumper at a time. 57 Before driving n To prevent damage to the camera lens (vehicles with rear view monitor system) 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Front seats Manual seats (Separated type seats) Passenger’s seat Driver’s seat Seat position adjustment lever Seatback angle adjustment lever Double Cab and CrewMax models Driver’s seat vertical height adjustment lever Driver’s seat cushion (front) angle adjustment knob Driver’s seat lumbar support adjustment switch (if equipped) 58 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Manual seat (Bench type seat) Seat position levers adjustment 1 Seatback angle adjustment levers Before driving Center seat seatback angle adjustment lever Double Cab and CrewMax models Driver’s seat vertical height adjustment lever Driver’s seat cushion (front) angle adjustment knob 59 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Power seat Passenger’s seat Driver’s seat Seat position adjustment switch Seatback angle adjustment switch Driver’s seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch Driver’s seat vertical height adjustment switch Driver’s seat leg support adjustment switch (if equipped) Seat lumbar support adjustment switch 60 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Folding passenger’s seat (if equipped on Regular Cab models) n Before folding passenger’s seat Push the seat belt hanger down as far as it will go when it is in the raised position. 1 Before driving Pass the seat belts through the seat belt hanger. This prevents the shoulder belt from being damaged. Make sure that the seat belt is removed from the hanger before using it. n Folding passenger’s seat Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever and raise the seatback to its upright position. 61 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Pull the seatback folding lever and fold the seatback down. CAUTION n Seat adjustment l Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage. l Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. l Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position. n After returning the seatback to the upright position Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. l Make sure the seatback is securely locked. l Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback. l Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use. n Caution while driving Vehicles with seatback table: Do not sit on or place anything on the folded seatback. 62 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Rear seats (Double Cab and CrewMax models) CrewMax models Seat position lever adjustment 1 Seatback angle adjustment lever Before driving Double Cab models The rear seats do not have a seat adjustment function. 63 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Raising the bottom cushion (Double Cab models) n Before raising the bottom cushion Stow the seat belt buckles. This prevents the seat belt buckles from falling out when you fold the seatback. Pass the seat belts through the seat belt hangers. This prevents the shoulder belt from being damaged. Make sure that the seat belts are removed from the hangers before using them. n Raising the bottom cushion Raise the bottom cushion up while pulling the lever until it locks. When returning bottom cushion to its original position, push the bottom cushion down while pulling the lever until it locks. 64 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Folding down rear seats (CrewMax models) n Before folding down rear seats Stow the rear seat belt buckles. Pass the seat belts through the seat belt hangers. This prevents the shoulder belt from being damaged. Make sure that the seat belts are removed from the hangers before using them. n Folding down rear seats Pull the lever to unlock the seatback and fold the seatback down until it locks. 65 1 Before driving This prevents the seat belt buckles from falling out when you fold the seatback. 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION n When adjusting a rear seat (CrewMax models) l Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage. l Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. l Be careful not to get your hands or feet caught in the seat. n Before folding down a rear seat Do not fold down a rear seat when there are passengers sitting in the rear seats or when there is luggage placed on/under the rear seats. n After adjusting a seat (CrewMax models) Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. l Make sure that the seat and seatback are securely locked in position by lightly rocking them back and forth. l Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seat. n When the seatback is folded/the bottom cushion is raised (Double Cab models) Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback or storage box while driving. n When returning the seats to their original position Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. l Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat. l Make sure the seatbacks and bottom cushions are securely locked. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly. l Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seat. l Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use. 66 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) NOTICE n When folding the seats l The seat belts and buckles must be stowed. l CrewMax models: Do not fold the rear seat seatback forward with the luggage cover hooks attached. 1 Before driving 67 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Driving position memory system (if equipped) Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be entered into the computer’s memory and recalled with the touch of a button. Two different driving positions can be entered into memory. n Entering a position into memory Check that the shift lever is set in P. Turn the engine switch to the ON position. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions. While pushing the SET button, push button “1” or “2” until the signal beeps. If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten. n Recalling the memorized position Check that the shift lever is set in P. Turn the engine switch to the ON position. Push button “1” or “2” to recall the desired position. 68 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation Memorized driving positions can be recalled when you unlock the driver’s door using the wireless remote control and open the driver’s door. 1 n Setting the linked door unlock operation Turn the engine switch off then, close the driver’s door. Push the “1” or “2” button and the button on the wireless remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you hear a beep. Open one of the doors. If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set. In case the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P. 110) n Canceling the linked door unlock operation Close the driver’s door with the engine switch turned off. Push the SET button and the button on the wireless remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you hear 2 beeps. 69 Before driving Set the driving positions into the memory system using the “1” or “2” buttons. (→P. 68) 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Retained accessory power Each memorized position (except for the tilt and telescopic steering column) can be activated within 30 seconds after the driver’s door is opened, even if the key is not in the engine switch. n If any position memory button is pushed while the adjustments are being made The operation will stop. To reactivate the system, push the button (“1” or “2”) again. n If the battery is disconnected The memorized positions must be reset because the computer’s memory is erased when the battery is disconnected. CAUTION n Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another seat position memory button. 70 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Head restraints n Adjusting the head restraints Front separated type seats Vertical adjustment 1 Up Before driving Down Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button. Lock release button Angle adjustment (if equipped) Front bench type seat Vertical adjustment Up Down Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button. Lock release button 71 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Rear seat (Double Cab models) Vertical adjustment Up Down Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button. Lock release button Rear seat (CrewMax models) Vertical adjustment Up Down Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button. Lock release button n Removing the front head restraints Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button. 72 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Removing the rear head restraints Double Cab models Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button. 1 Before driving CrewMax models Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button. n Adjusting the height of the head restraints Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. n Adjusting the front center seat (bench type seat) and rear center seat head restraints (Double Cab and CrewMax models) Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using. 73 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION n Head restraint precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. l Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. l Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. l Do not drive with the head restraints removed. 74 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Seat belts Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. n Correct use of the seat belts 1 Before driving l Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder. l Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips. l Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat. l Do not twist the seat belt. n Fastening and releasing the seat belt Fastening the belt Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard. 75 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Releasing the belt Press the release button. Release button n Using front seat belt (Regular Cab models) Raise the front seat hanger until it locks. 76 belt 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Adjusting the height of the belt Front seats (Double Cab and CrewMax models) Down 1 Before driving Push the lock release button and slide the height adjuster down. Up Move the height adjuster up as needed until you hear a click. 77 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Rear seats (CrewMax models) Down Push the lock release button and slide the height adjuster down. Up Move the height adjuster up as needed until you hear a click. Seat belt pretensioners (front seats) The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision or a vehicle rollover. The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact. 78 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully. 1 n Automatic locking retractor (ALR) n Pregnant women Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 75) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area. If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision. n People suffering illness Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. 79 Before driving When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (→P. 144) 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Child seat belt usage The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. l Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child become large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 138) l When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 75 regarding seat belt usage. n Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions. n Seat belt extender If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge. CAUTION Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident. Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury. n Wearing a seat belt l Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. l Always wear a seat belt properly. l Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children. l Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system. 80 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION n Wearing a seat belt l Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. l Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips. n Seat belt pretensioners l Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision. l If the pretensioner has activated, the seat belt becomes locked: it cannot be further extended, nor will it return to the stowed position. The seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer. n Child restraint lock function belt Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. n Seat belt damage and wear l Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door. l Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belt cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury. l Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. l Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage. l Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury. 81 Before driving l Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. 1 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION n Before using a front seat belt (Regular Cab models) Make sure the seat belt hanger is secured in the raised position before you fasten the seat belt. n Using a seat belt extender l Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender. l Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or injury in the event of a collision. l The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended. NOTICE n When using a seat belt extender When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself. 82 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Steering wheel (manually adjustable type) The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position. n To change the angle Hold the steering wheel and press the lever down. 1 Before driving Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel vertically. Pull the lever up. n To change the column length (vehicles with separate type seats) Hold the steering wheel and press the lever down. Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally. Pull the lever up. CAUTION n Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. n After adjusting the steering wheel Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. 83 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Steering wheel (power-adjustable type) The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position. Up Down Toward the driver Away from the driver Auto tilt away When the key is removed from the engine switch, the steering wheel returns to its stowed position by moving up and away to enable easier driver entry and exit. Inserting the key into the engine switch returns the steering wheel to its original position. CAUTION n Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 84 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Anti-glare inside rear view mirror Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by using the following functions. Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror 1 Normal position Before driving Anti-glare position 85 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduces the reflected light. Turns automatic mode ON/ OFF The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned on. The mirror will revert to the automatic mode each time the engine switch is turned on. n To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror) To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them. 86 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION n Caution while driving Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 1 Before driving 87 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Outside rear view mirrors Mirror angle can be adjusted. Power-adjustable type (Type A) Select a mirror to adjust. (L: left or R: right) Adjust the mirror up, down, in or out using the switch. 88 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Power-adjustable type (Type B) Select a mirror to adjust. (L: left or R: right) 1 Before driving Adjust the mirror up, down, in or out using the switch. Power-adjustable type (Type C) Upper part mirror: Select a mirror to adjust. (L: left or R: right) Adjust the mirror up, down, in or out using the switch. Lower part mirror: Adjust the mirror up and down, in or out by pushing the mirror surface. 89 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Manually adjustable type Adjust the mirror up, down, in or out by pushing the mirror surface. Folding back the mirrors From outside (Type A) Push backward to fold the mirrors. From outside (Type B) Push backward to fold the mirrors. 90 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) From inside (if equipped) Press the switch. Pressing again will extend the mirrors. 1 Before driving Extending the mirrors (if equipped) The mirrors can be slid outward to improve visibility around wide trailers. 91 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Recommended mirror angle when towing a trailer (vehicles with extending mirrors) Power adjust the upper part of the mirror until an appropriate view is obtained. It is recommended that the outer 2/3 of the upper mirror be filled with images other than the vehicle and trailer. Manually adjust the lower part of the mirror until an appropriate view of the towed object is obtained. It is recommended that the outer 2/3 of the lower mirror be filled with images other than the trailer. n Mirror operating conditions (if equipped) The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position. n When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers) Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (→P. 293, 295) n Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position memory) A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (→P. 68) n Auto anti-glare function (if equipped) When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (→P. 85) 92 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION n When driving the vehicle Observe the following precautions while driving. Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. l Do not drive with the mirrors folded back. l Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving. n When a mirror is moving To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror. n When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers) Do not touch the surface of the mirror, as it may be hot. NOTICE n If ice should jam the mirror Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the mirror. 93 Before driving l Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. 1 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Power windows (if equipped) The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches. Driver’s power window switches Closing Opening One-touch opening* (driver’s window only) *: Pressing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway. Front and rear passenger’s power window switch Closing Opening 94 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Lock switch Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches. n The power windows can be operated when The engine switch is in the ON position. n Operating the power windows after turning the engine switch off The power windows can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC position or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. CAUTION n Closing the windows Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. l Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated. l Do not allow children to operate the power windows. Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death. 95 1 Before driving Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window. 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Back window (if equipped) The back window can be opened and closed using the lock release lever. OPEN/CLOSE Push the lock release lever and slide the back window. n Closing the back window Make sure that the back window is securely closed after closing it. CAUTION n Caution while driving Keep the back window closed. This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. 96 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Power back window (CrewMax models only) The back window can be opened and closed using the switch. Opening Closing 1 Before driving n The power back window can be operated when The engine switch is in the ON position. n Operating the power back windows after turning the engine switch off The power back windows can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC position or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. 97 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof CAUTION n Closing the back window Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. l Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated. l Do not allow children to operate the power back window. Closing a back window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death. n Caution while driving Keep the back window closed. This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. 98 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Moon roof (if equipped) Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down. n Opening and closing 1 Open Before driving Close To stop partway, press the switch lightly. 99 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof n Tilt up and down Tilt up Tilt down To stop partway, press the switch lightly. n The moon roof can be operated when The engine switch is in the ON position. n Door lock linked moon roof operation The moon roof can be opened and closed using the key. (→P. 47) n Operating the moon roof after turning the engine switch off The moon roof can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. n Jam protection function If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly. n If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically Keep the switch depressed. 100 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof n Sunshade The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened. n Moon roof open reminder function An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not fully closed and the engine switch off. The moon roof must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation. Push and hold the switch toward the UP (tilt up) side or close) side. (sliding After the moon roof will tilt up and down, release the switch. To ensure the initialization is complete, make sure automatic opening and closing functions work properly. n Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. moon roof) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 633) 101 Before driving n When the battery is disconnected 1 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof CAUTION n Opening the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury. l Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving. l Do not sit on top of the moon roof. n Closing the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. l Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated. l Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury. n Jam protection function l Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally. l The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes. 102 1-5. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap. n Before refueling the vehicle Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed. Before driving n Opening the fuel tank cap 1 Open the fuel filler door. Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open. 103 1-5. Refueling Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door. Closing the fuel tank cap When installing the fuel tank cap, turn it until you hear a click. The cap will turn slightly to the opposite direction when released. n Fuel types (Gasoline engine) Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher) n Fuel types (Flex-fuel engine) Use unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher), E85, or a blend of these two fuels. (→P. 618) 104 1-5. Refueling n Identifying flex-fuel vehicles l Flex-fuel vehicles can be identified by the fuel tank cap, which is marked “FLEXFUEL E85/GASOLINE”. 1 Before driving n Fuel tank capacity Approximately 26.4 gal. (100 L, 22.0 Imp. gal.) n E85 Fueling Stations (Flex-fuel vehicles) E85 fueling stations and fuel pumps can be identified by the indication “E85 85% Ethanol”. For more information about fueling stations, please refer to the U.S. Department of Energy Web site. http://www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html n Refueling (Flex-fuel vehicles) Observe the following precautions when switching fuels, in order to maintain starting and driving performance. l Do not change fuels when the fuel level is 1/4 or less. l Always add at least 2.6 gal. (10 L) of fuel. l After filling up with fuel, warm up the engine or drive the vehicle for at least 5 minutes or 7 miles (11 km). l Do not accelerate rapidly immediately after refueling. 105 1-5. Refueling CAUTION n Refueling the vehicle Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. l Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity. Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite. l Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury. l Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank. l Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled. l Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire. l Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard. n When replacing the fuel cap Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury. 106 1-5. Refueling NOTICE n Refueling n To prevent damage to the fuel filler door Do not apply excessive force. n E85 fuel E85 fuel can be used only in flex-fuel vehicles. Do not add E85 fuel to a gasoline-engine vehicle. Filling a gasoline-engine vehicle with E85 will have a negative impact on starting and driving performance and will cause damage to the fuel system components. 107 1 Before driving Do not spill fuel during refueling. Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface. 1-6. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system (if equipped) The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. The indicator flashes after the key has been removed from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating. n System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system. n Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction l If the key is in contact with a metallic object l If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle n Certifications for the engine immobilizer system For vehicles sold in U.S.A. FCC ID: MOZRI-21BTY This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 108 1-6. Theft deterrent system For vehicles sold in Canada This device complied with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. n To prevent damage to the key Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. 109 Before driving NOTICE 1 1-6. Theft deterrent system Alarm (if equipped) The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is detected. n Triggering of the alarm The alarm is triggered in the following situations. l A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the wireless remote control door lock function or key. The doors will lock again automatically. l The hood is opened while the vehicle is locked. l Vehicles with the glass breakage sensor (if equipped): The side windows are tapped or broken. l The battery is reconnected. n Setting the alarm system Close the doors and hood, and lock all doors using the wireless remote control or key. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds. The indicator changes from being on to flashing when the system is set. n Deactivating or stopping the alarm l Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control or key. l Turn the engine switch to the ON position. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.) 110 1-6. Theft deterrent system n Items to check before locking the vehicle To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following. 1 l Nobody is in the vehicle. l The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set. Before driving l No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle. n Triggering of the alarm The alarm may be triggered in the following situations. (Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.) l A person inside the vehicle opens a door or hood. l The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. n Panic mode →P. 44 n When the battery is disconnected Be sure to cancel the alarm system. If the battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be triggered when the battery is reconnected. 111 1-6. Theft deterrent system Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.) These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law. 112 1-7. Safety information Correct driving posture Drive in a good posture as follows: Sit upright and well back in the seat. (→P. 58) Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable. Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest. (→P. 83, 84) Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (→P. 71) Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P. 75) 113 1 Before driving Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (→P. 58) 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n While driving l Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. l Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger. l Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged. n Adjusting the seat position l Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion, to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury. l Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. l Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism. 114 1-7. Safety information SRS airbags The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury. 1 Before driving Front airbags Driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and right front passenger from impact with interior components. Side and curtain shield airbags Side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants. Curtain shield airbags Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants. 115 1-7. Safety information Airbag system components Regular Cab models Double Cab and CrewMax models 116 1-7. Safety information Side airbags AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights Occupant detection system (ECU and sensors) Front passenger airbag RSCA OFF switch Side and curtain shield airbag sensors Driver’s seat position sensor Front airbag sensors Driver airbag Airbag sensor assembly Driver’s seat belt buckle switch Curtain shield airbag sensors (Double Cab and CrewMax models) 1 Before driving Curtain shield airbags SRS warning light and RSCA OFF indicator light Passenger airbag off switch (Regular Cab models) Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and right front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc. The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor. Front bench type seat: The SRS airbags are designed to protect the driver and right front passenger, and they are not designed to protect an occupant in the front center seating position. In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants. 117 1-7. Safety information n SRS warning light This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, passenger airbag off switch (Regular Cab models), front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, RSCA OFF indicator light, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (→P. 546) n If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) l Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating) SRS airbag. l A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. l Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot. l The front windshield may crack. n Operating conditions (front airbags) l The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform. However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.). l It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together. l The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the right front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 131) 118 1-7. Safety information n Operating conditions (side airbags) l The SRS side airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side. n Operating conditions (curtain shield airbags) The SRS curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side or vehicle rollover. n Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration. l Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface l Falling into or jumping over a deep hole l Landing hard or vehicle falling The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situation shown in the illustration. l The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal. l The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone. 119 1 Before driving l The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the right front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 131) 1-7. Safety information n Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags) The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur. l Collision from the side l Collision from the rear l Vehicle rollover n Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (side airbags and curtain shield airbags) The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment. l Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment l Collision from the side at an angle The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed side collision. l Collision from the front l Collision from the rear l Vehicle rollover 120 1-7. Safety information The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision. l Collision from the front 1 l Collision from the rear Before driving l Pitching end over end n When to contact your Toyota dealer In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer. l Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated. l The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate. l A portion of a door is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate. l The pad section of the steering wheel or dashboard near the front passenger airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. 121 1-7. Safety information l The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged. l The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged. CAUTION n SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. l The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts. l The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises: Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you now sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away, you can change your driving position in several ways: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. • If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. 122 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n SRS airbag precautions The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals and steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls. l The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright. l Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. (→P. 138) 123 Before driving l If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver’s seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver’s seat belt, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver’s airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender. 1 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n SRS airbag precautions l Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard. l Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger. l Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger has items resting on their knees. l Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars. l Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle. 124 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n SRS airbag precautions l Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip. l Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy. l Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. l Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components (→P. 116). Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction. l Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot. l If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. l If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer. 125 1 Before driving l Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard or steering wheel pad. These items can become projectiles when SRS driver and front passenger airbags deploy. 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury. l Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags. l Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails. l Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment. l Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.). l Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system. l Do not use tires or wheels other than the manufacturer’s recommended size. (→P. 615) l Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players. l Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability. 126 1-7. Safety information Passenger airbag off switch (Regular Cab models) The passenger airbag off switch is designed to disable the front passenger airbag in order to allow usage, if necessary, of the right passenger seat by a member of a passenger risk group identified in TABLE 1 (→P. 128). This position makes the front passenger airbag system operational. At this time, the indicator light condition varies depending on the size of the occupant in the right passenger seat. OFF position The front passenger airbag is disabled. At this time, the AIR BAG OFF indicator light will come on. n Operation of the passenger airbag off switch Turn the key clockwise to the AUTO position. Turn the key counterclockwise to the OFF position and remove it. If the key is removed at any other position than OFF, the switch will automatically return to the AUTO position. 127 Before driving AUTO position 1 1-7. Safety information n Passenger risk group TABLE 1: A PASSENGER RISK GROUP Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the front seat because: • Vehicle has no rear seat; • Vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or • The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because: • Vehicle has no rear seat: • Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of vehicle; or • The child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which according to his or her physician: • Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger: and • Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard, or windshield in a crash. For more detailed information concerning about the passenger risk group, please contact NHTSA at 1-888-327-4236 or Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371. 128 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n When the passenger airbag off switch is turned off l Do not turn the passenger airbag off switch to the OFF position except when a member of a passenger risk group identified in TABLE 1 is occupying the right passenger seating position. Deactivating the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover ON/OFF (hold for a few seconds) The RSCA OFF indicator turns on. (only when the engine switch is in the ON position.) The roll sensing function for the curtain shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners will turn back on automatically each time the engine switch is turned on. n The switch only should be used In a situation where inflation is not desired (such as during extreme off-road driving). n Operating conditions when the RSCA OFF indicator is on l The curtain shield airbag and seat belt pretensioner will not activate in a vehicle rollover. l The curtain shield airbag will activate in a severe side impact. 129 Before driving l The front passenger airbag will not inflate in a collision and turning off the front passenger airbag can reduce the occupant protection which your vehicle safety systems can provide to you in certain accidents and increase the likelihood of death or serious injuries. 1 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n For normal driving Make sure the RSCA OFF indicator is not turned on. If it is left on, the curtain shield airbag will not activate in the event of an accident, which may result in death or serious injury. 130 1-7. Safety information Front passenger occupant classification system Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the right front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger. 1 Before driving SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light AIR BAG ON indicator light AIR BAG OFF indicator light 131 1-7. Safety information Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system Regular Cab models l Indicator/warning light Condition detected by the front passenger occupant classification system*1 Passenger airbag off switch position AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights AUTO AIR BAG ON OFF AIR BAG OFF Adult*2 Child*3 or child restraint system*4 AUTO OFF AUTO Not illuminated OFF AIR BAG OFF Unoccupied There is a malfunction in the system 132 AIR BAG OFF*6 AUTO OFF AIR BAG OFF SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off Flashing*5 Off Flashing*5 Off Off On Off 1-7. Safety information l Devices Adult*2 Child*3 or child restraint system*4 Unoccupied There is a malfunction in the system Passenger airbag off switch position Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the passenger seat AUTO Activated OFF Deactivated Curtain Front passhield airsenger’s bag in the seat belt passen- pretensioner ger side Activated AUTO Activated Deactivated OFF AUTO Deactivated Activated Deactivated OFF AUTO Deactivated OFF Activated *1: The right passenger on the bench type seat. *2: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture. *3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture. *4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P. 138) *5: In the event the passenger does not wear a seat belt. 133 1 Before driving Condition detected by the front passenger occupant classification system*1 1-7. Safety information *6: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual for installing the child restraint system properly. (→P. 138) Double Cab and CrewMax models l Indicator/warning light Condition detected by the front passenger occupant classification system*1 AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Adult*2 AIR BAG ON Off Flashing*5 AIR BAG OFF*6 Off Flashing*5 Unoccupied Not illuminated Off Off There is a malfunction in the system AIR BAG OFF On Off Child*3 or child restraint system*4 l Devices Condition detected Front pasby the front passensenger airger occupant clasbag sification system*1 Side airbag on the front passenger seat Adult*2 Child*3 or child 134 Curtain shield air- Front pasbag in the senger’s seat belt front paspretensioner senger side Activated restraint system*4 Deactivated Unoccupied Deactivated There is a malfunction in the system Deactivated Activated Activated Deactivated Activated 1-7. Safety information *1: The right front passenger on the bench type seat. *2: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture. *4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P. 138) *5: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt. *6: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual for installing the child restraint system properly. (→P. 138) CAUTION n Front passenger occupant classification system precautions Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. l Wear the seat belt properly. l Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat. l Make sure the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the right front passenger seat. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the right front passenger side airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision. 135 Before driving *3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/ her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture. 1 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n Front passenger occupant classification system precautions l Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket). l Do not apply pressure to the right front passenger seat by resting hands or legs on the seatback. l Double Cab and CrewMax models: Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat. l Double Cab and CrewMax models: Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs. l Do not put objects under the front passenger seat. l Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat or a back wall. This may cause the AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat or back wall, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat or back wall. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system. l If an adult sits in the right front passenger seat, the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the right front passenger seat fully rearward. l When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (→P. 144) l Do not modify or remove the front seats. l Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately. 136 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n Front passenger occupant classification system precautions l Double Cab and CrewMax models: Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks. l Do not attach a commercial seatback table or other heavy item to the back of the front passenger seat. l Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat. 137 Before driving l Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface. 1 1-7. Safety information Child restraint systems A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems. Points to remember Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat. l Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child. l For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (→P. 144) Types of child restraints Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child. Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat 138 1-7. Safety information Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat 1 Before driving Booster seat n Selecting an appropriate child restraint system l Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belts. l If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 75) 139 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n Child restraint precautions l For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior. l Regular Cab models: Toyota strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child. l Double Cab and CrewMax models: Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. l Regular Cab models: Never put infant or child age 1 to 12 in a passenger risk group on the right passenger seat with the passenger airbag off switch in the AUTO position. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child. If you must put infant or child age 1 to 12 in a passenger risk group on the right passenger seat, make sure that the passenger airbag off switch is in the OFF position with the key removed and that the indicator light is on. (→P. 127) l Double Cab and CrewMax models: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. 140 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n Child restraint precautions l Regular Cab models: If you must install a rear-facing child restraint system on the right passenger seat, make sure that the passenger airbag off switch is in the OFF position with the key removed and that the indicator light is on. l Regular Cab models (Bench type seat): Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the center seat even if the passenger airbag off switch is in the OFF position. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the driver airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child. l Double Cab and CrewMax models: A forward-facing child restraint system may be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured. 141 1 Before driving l Regular Cab models: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the right passenger seat with the passenger airbag off switch in the AUTO position. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the right passenger seat. 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n Child restraint precautions l Regular Cab models: A forward-facing child restraint system which belongs to a passenger risk group should never be installed on the right passenger seat with the passenger airbag off switch in the AUTO position, because the force of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child in forward seating position. (→P. 128) l Regular Cab models (Bench type seat): Do not install a child restraint system on the center seat if it interferes with driving operations such as changing the shift lever position. In this case, install the child restraint system on the right passenger seat. l Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision. l Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the force of the rapid inflation could cause death or serious injury to the child. l Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident. n Child restraint lock function belt precaution Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt. 142 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n When the child restraint system is not in use l Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment. 143 Before driving l If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. 1 1-7. Safety information Installing child restraints Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint. The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system. Child restraint LATCH anchors Regular Cab models LATCH anchors are provided for the right passenger seat. Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seat. Double Cab models LATCH anchors are provided for the outside rear seats. Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats. CrewMax models LATCH anchors are provided for the outside rear seats. Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats. 144 1-7. Safety information Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (→P. 79) Anchor brackets are provided for all passenger seats. Separated type seat Bench type seat Double Cab models Anchor brackets are provided for all rear passenger seats. CrewMax models Anchor brackets are provided for all rear passenger seats. 145 Before driving Anchor bracket (for top tether strap) Regular Cab models 1 1-7. Safety information Installing the child restraint system on the right passenger seat (Regular Cab models) When you install a child restraint system which belongs to a passenger risk group on the right passenger seat, do the following procedure. Turn the passenger airbag off switch counterclockwise to the OFF position and remove the key. The AIR BAG OFF indicator light comes on when the front passenger airbag system is off. (→P. 127) CAUTION n Rear-facing child restraint system If you must install a rear-facing child restraint system on the right passenger seat, make sure that the passenger airbag off switch is in the OFF position with the key removed and that the indicator light is on. n Forward-facing child restraint system A forward-facing child restraint system which belongs to a passenger risk group should never be installed on the right passenger seat with the passenger airbag off switch in the AUTO position, because the force of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child in forward seating position. (→P. 128) 146 1-7. Safety information Installation with LATCH system (Regular Cab models) n Installing on the right passenger seat (vehicles without seatback table) 1st lock position 13th lock position Type A Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors and tighten the lower straps. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 156) Canada only For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. 147 1 Before driving Fold the seatback while pulling the lever. Return the seatback and secure it at the 1st lock position (most upright position). Adjust the seatback to the 13th lock position. (→P. 61) 1-7. Safety information Type B Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 156) For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Canada only n Installing on the right passenger seat (vehicles with seatback table) Fold down the seatback and back to the 1st lock position (most upright position) until it locks into place. Adjust the seatback to the 13th lock position. (→P. 61) 1st lock position 13th lock position 148 1-7. Safety information Type A Widen the slits of the seat cushion slightly. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 156) Canada only For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Type B Widen the slits of the seat cushion slightly. Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether anchor. (→P. 156) For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Canada only 149 1 Before driving Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors and tighten the lower straps. 1-7. Safety information Installation with LATCH system (Double Cab models) Type A Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly. Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors and tighten the lower straps. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 158) Canada only 150 For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. 1-7. Safety information Type B Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 158) Canada only For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Installation with LATCH system (CrewMax models) If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 162) Fold down the seatback and back to the 1st lock position (most upright position) until it locks into place. Adjust the seatback to the 8th lock position. (→P. 63) 1st lock position 8th lock position 151 1 Before driving Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. 1-7. Safety information Type A Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly. Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors and tighten the lower straps. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Canada only Type B Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly. Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Canada only 152 1-7. Safety information Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt) n Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat Place the child seat on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle. 1 Before driving Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the ALR lock mode. Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only. 153 1-7. Safety information While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. n Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat CrewMax models: If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 162) Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. 154 1-7. Safety information Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the ALR lock mode. 1 Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. Regular Cab and Double Cab models: If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 156, 158) n Booster seat Place the booster seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. 155 Before driving While pushing the child seat into the seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place. 1-7. Safety information Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (→P. 75) Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt. STN17AH043 Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (Regular Cab models) Remove the head restraint. Installing position: Right side passenger seat Center passenger seat (Bench type seat) 156 1-7. Safety information Remove cover. the anchor bracket Installing position: Right side passenger seat 1 Store the removed cover in a safe place such as the glove box. Right side passenger seat Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. Center passenger seat (bench type seat) Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. 157 Before driving Center passenger seat (Bench type seat) 1-7. Safety information Replace the head restraint. Installing position: Right side passenger seat Center passenger seat (Bench type seat) Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (Double Cab models) n Right rear seat or center rear seat Raise the head restraints of right and center seats. Pull up the straps of right and center seats. 158 1-7. Safety information Right rear seat Route the top tether strap through the routing device as shown in the illustration. 1 Make sure the top tether strap is not twisted. Before driving Routing device Center rear seat Route the top tether strap through the routing device as shown in the illustration. Make sure the top tether strap is not twisted. Routing device Right rear seat Latch the hook onto the inner anchor strap ring and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. Inner anchor strap ring 159 1-7. Safety information Center rear seat Latch the hook onto the inner anchor strap ring and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. Inner anchor strap ring Lower the head restraints of right and center seats. n Left rear seat Raise the head restraints of center and left seats. 160 1-7. Safety information Pull up the straps of center and left seats. 1 Make sure the top tether strap is not twisted. Routing device Latch the hook onto the inner anchor strap ring and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. Inner anchor strap ring Lower the head restraints of center and left seats. 161 Before driving Route the top tether strap through the routing device as shown in the illustration. 1-7. Safety information Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (CrewMax models) Remove the head restraint. Installing position: Outside passenger seat Center passenger seat Outside passenger seat Swing the seatback forward slightly. (→P. 63) Open the anchor bracket cover. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket. Return the seatback to its original position. Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback. 162 1-7. Safety information Center passenger seat Swing the seatback forward slightly. (→P. 63) Return the seatback to its original position. Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback. Secure the child restraint using LATCH anchors (→P. 151) or a seat belt (→P. 154), and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. Replace the head restraint. Installing position: Outside passenger seat Center passenger seat n Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819. 163 1 Before driving Open the anchor bracket cover. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket. 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n When installing a booster seat Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode. (→P. 79) l ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child. n When installing a child restraint system Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place. If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident. l Double Cab and CrewMax models: If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat. l Double Cab and CrewMax models: Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system. l Only put a forward-facing or booster child seat on the front seat when it is unavoidable. When installing a forward -facing or booster child seat on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate). 164 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n When installing a child restraint system Same angle Same position l CrewMax models: When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both seat cushions to the same position and align seatbacks at the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in a collision. Same angle Same position l CrewMax models: When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint system, move the seat as far back as possible and adjust the seatback as upright as possible. l When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking. l Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted. l Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is secure. l After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. 165 1 Before driving l Regular Cab models (bench type seat): In order to firmly secure the child restraint system, align the seatback angle and seat position of the right passenger seat to match the center passenger seat. Otherwise, it could cause death or injury in a collision. 1-7. Safety information CAUTION n When installing a child restraint system l Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. l After securing the child restraint system, never slide or recline the seat. n Do not use a seat belt extender If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision. n To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. 166 2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving. n Starting the engine (→P. 177) n Driving With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P. 180) Release the parking brake. (→P. 186) Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. n Stopping With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. If necessary, set the parking brake. When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. (→P. 180) n Parking the vehicle With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. Set the parking brake. (→P. 186) Shift the shift lever to P. (→P. 180) When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels. Turn the engine switch off to stop the engine. Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person. 168 2-1. Driving procedures Starting on a steep uphill With the brake pedal depressed, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D. Gently depress the accelerator pedal. Release the parking brake. n Driving in the rain 2 l Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery. l Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly. n Breaking in your new Toyota To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe: l For the first 200 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops. l For the first 500 miles (800 km): Do not tow a trailer. l For the first 1000 miles (1600 km): • • • • Do not drive at extremely high speeds. Avoid sudden acceleration. Do not drive continuously in the low gears. Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods. n Drum-in disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding down. 169 When driving l Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery. 2-1. Driving procedures n Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (→P. 606) n Normal characteristics after turning off the engine Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction. CAUTION n When starting the vehicle Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. n When driving the vehicle l Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. • Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. • When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly. • Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly. • Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident. l Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby. l Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle. 170 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION n When driving the vehicle l If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the back window is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. l Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to an accident. l Do not turn the engine off while driving. The power steering and brake booster systems will not operate properly if the engine is not running. l Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (→P. 180) l When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident. l Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury. l Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury. l Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds. 171 2 When driving l Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result in a loss of vehicle control. 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION n When driving on slippery road surfaces l Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident. l Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by upshifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident. l After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident. n When shifting the shift lever l Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. n When the vehicle is stopped l Do not race the engine. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident. l Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior. l Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an accident caused by the vehicle moving. 172 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION n When the vehicle is parked l Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following. l If the shift lever is moved before the 4LO indicator turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.) Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the transfer mode. (→P. 225) l Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns. l Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. 173 2 When driving • Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire. • The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack. • Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components. l Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION n Exhaust gases Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard. l If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. l The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. l Toyota does not recommend occupying the rear cargo area when it is fitted with a slide-in camper, camper shell or other type cover while the engine is running. This caution applies to both driving and stopped or parked situations with the engine running. Particular care should be taken to prevent exhaust gases from entering camper bodies, trailers or other enclosures on or around your vehicle. If exhaust fumes are detected, open all windows and thoroughly ventilate the area. n When taking a nap in the vehicle Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard. n When braking the vehicle l When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle. 174 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION n When braking the vehicle l If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase. l Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes. 2 l The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer. Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately. When driving NOTICE n When driving the vehicle l Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill. n When parking the vehicle Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed. n Avoiding damage to vehicle parts l Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long time. Doing so may damage the power steering pump. l When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc. 175 2-1. Driving procedures NOTICE n If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving (brake pad wear limit indicators) Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded. n If you get a flat tire while driving A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle. l It may be difficult to control your vehicle. l The vehicle will make abnormal sounds. l The vehicle will behave abnormally. Replace a flat tire with a new one. (→P. 558) n When encountering flooded roads Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle. l Engine stalling l Short in electrical components l Engine damage caused by water immersion In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following. l Brake function l Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, transfer (4WD models), differentials, etc. l Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc. 176 2-1. Driving procedures Engine (ignition) switch n Engine switch LOCK The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed. ACC Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. All electrical components can be used. START For starting the engine. n Starting the engine Check that the parking brake is set. Check that the shift lever is set in P. Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal. Turn the engine switch to the START position and start the engine. The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 25 seconds, whichever is less. If you turn the engine switch, the engine will keep cranking for about 30 seconds maximum. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started. 177 When driving ON 2 2-1. Driving procedures n Turning the key from ACC to LOCK Shift the shift lever to P. (→P. 180) Push in the key and turn to the LOCK position. n Steering lock release When starting the engine, the engine switch may seem stuck in the LOCK position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly in either direction. n If the engine does not start (vehicles with engine immobilizer system) The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 108) n Key reminder function A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in the ACC or LOCK position to remind you to remove the key. CAUTION n When starting the engine Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. n Caution while driving Do not turn the engine switch to the LOCK position. If in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the engine switch only to the ACC position. 178 2-1. Driving procedures NOTICE n To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the engine switch in the ACC or ON position for long periods if the engine is not running. n When starting the engine l Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems. 2 l Do not race a cold engine. 179 When driving l If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately. 2-1. Driving procedures Automatic transmission Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions. n Shifting the shift lever Floor shift type While the engine switch is on, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever. Column-shift type While the engine switch is on, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever. 180 2-1. Driving procedures n Shift position uses Shift position Function P Parking the vehicle or starting the engine R Reversing N Neutral D Normal driving*1 S S mode driving*2 2 To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in D for normal driving. *2: Selecting shift ranges S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, control engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary upshifting. Changing shift ranges in S mode Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever. Floor shift type Upshift range Downshift range 181 When driving *1: 2-1. Driving procedures Column-shift type Upshift range Downshift range The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4 (6-speed models) or 4 (5-speed models) according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 or 2 (6-speed models) or 3 (5speed models) if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position. (→P. 184) n Shift ranges and their functions Shift range Function 6-speed models 5-speed models 6 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. — 5 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 4 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 4 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 3 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 3 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 2 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 2 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 1 Setting the gear at 1. A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range. 182 2-1. Driving procedures TOW/HAUL switch (6-speed models with towing package) Use TOW/HAUL mode when pulling a trailer or hauling a heavy load. Floor shift type Press the TOW/HAUL switch. The indicator will come on. Press the switch once more to cancel the mode. 2 When driving Column-shift type 183 2-1. Driving procedures n Gear range display when driving in S mode The current gear range is displayed on the combination meter. (→P. 181) n When driving with the cruise control system (if equipped) The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting to 5 or 4 (6-speed models) or 4 or 3 (5-speed models). (→P. 214) n If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P →P. 577 n If the S indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer, immediately. (In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.) n AI-SHIFT The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the driver performance and driving conditions. The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.) n Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the S mode) To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.) 184 2-1. Driving procedures Turn signal lever Left turn Right turn Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change. The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever. The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever. n Turn signals can be operated when The engine switch is in the ON position. n If the indicators flash faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out. 185 2 When driving Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change. 2-1. Driving procedures Parking brake U.S.A. Canada Sets the parking brake*. (Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.) At this time, the indicator will come on. *: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot. n Parking brake engaged warning buzzer The buzzer sounds to indicate that parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). NOTICE n Before driving Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. 186 2-1. Driving procedures Horn To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark. 2 When driving n After adjusting the steering wheel (manually adjustable type) Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked. (→P. 83) 187 2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters Vehicles with multi-information display The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the engine switch is in the ON position. Tachometer Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed. Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank. Voltmeter Displays the charge state. Engine oil pressure gauge Displays the engine oil pressure. Engine coolant temperature gauge Displays the engine coolant temperature. Odometer/trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed. 188 2-2. Instrument cluster Multi-information display →P. 198 Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge Displays the automatic transmission fluid temperature. 2 When driving 189 2-2. Instrument cluster Vehicles without multi-information display (type A) Vehicles without multi-information display (type B) The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the engine switch is in the ON position. Tachometer (if equipped) Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed. 190 2-2. Instrument cluster Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank. Voltmeter (if equipped) Displays the charge state. Engine oil pressure gauge (if equipped) Displays the engine oil pressure. Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 Displays the engine coolant temperature. Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed. Odometer/trip meter Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven. Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently. Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge (if equipped) Displays the automatic transmission fluid temperature. 191 When driving Odometer/trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button 2-2. Instrument cluster Odometer and trip meter display button Pressing this button switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Vehicles with multi-information display Odometer Trip meter A* Trip meter B* *:Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter. Vehicles without multi-information display Odometer Trip meter A* Trip meter B* *:Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter. 192 2-2. Instrument cluster Instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. Brighter Darker Vehicles with multi-information display NOTICE n To prevent damage to the engine and its components l Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed. l The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 585) n While driving l When the voltmeter indicates more than 19 V or less than 9 V, the battery may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer. l When the engine oil pressure gauge does not work properly, immediately stop the engine and contact your Toyota dealer. l When the automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. (if equipped) 193 2 When driving With the dial turned fully up, the intensity of the instrument panel lights will not be reduced even when the tail lights/headlights are turned on. 2-2. Instrument cluster Indicators and warning lights The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems. n Instrument cluster Vehicles with multi-information display Vehicles without multi-information display (type A) 194 2-2. Instrument cluster Vehicles without multi-information display (type B) 2 When driving n Center panel 195 2-2. Instrument cluster n Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems. Turn signal indicator (→P. 185) Headlight indicator (→P. 207) (U.S.A.) Headlight high beam indicator (→P. 207) Tail light indicator (→P. 207) (Canada) Security indicator (→P. 108) *1 AUTO LSD indicator (→P. 227, 232) (If equipped) *1 Shift position and shift range indicators (→P. 180) *1 *1 (If equipped) *1,5 Cruise control indicator (→P. 214) RSCA OFF indicator (→P. 129) AIR BAG ON indicator (→P. 131) AIR BAG OFF indicator (→P. 131) 4HI indicator (→P. 223) (4WD models) Slip indicator (→ P. 227, 232, 233) 4LO indicator (→P. 223) (4WD models) *1 VSC OFF indicator (→P. 227, 232, 233) TOW HAUL indicator (→P. 183) (If equipped) 196 2-2. Instrument cluster n Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (→P. 545) *2 *1 (Canada) *1 *1 *1 (U.S.A.) (Canada) 1,3 (U.S.A.) 1 * *3 *1 * *1 *1 *1 2 (U.S.A.) *1,6 *1:These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the ON position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer for details. *2:Vehicles with multi-information display *3:Vehicles without multi-information display *4:Vehicles without tachometer *5:The indicator flashes to indicate that the system is operating. *6:The indicator comes on to indicate a malfunction. CAUTION n If a safety system warning light does not come on Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS airbag warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs. 197 When driving *1,4 2-2. Instrument cluster Multi-information display (if equipped) The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data. l Trip information Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising-related information. l Warning messages (→P. 554) Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems. l Odometer and trip meter display (→P. 192) Trip information Display items can be switched by pushing the INFO button. 198 2-2. Instrument cluster Zoom display of odometer and trip meters Displays the odometer and one of the trip meters simultaneously. Average Fuel Economy Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset. Current Fuel Economy Displays the current rate of fuel consumption. Distance To Empty Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining. l This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. l When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. Trip Timer Displays the driving time. To calculate the driving time, press the SELECT RESET button, and to stop the calculation, press it again. To reset the calculation, press the SELECT RESET button for more than 2 seconds. 199 When driving The function can be reset by pushing the SELECT RESET button for more than 2 seconds. 2 2-2. Instrument cluster Average Speed Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started or the function was reset. The function can be reset by pushing the SELECT RESET button for more than 2 seconds. Feature customization The vehicle can be customized while the vehicle is stopped. Press the SETUP US/M button to select the item you want to customize unit. UNITS KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER KEYLESS ENTRY ALL DOORS UNLOCK DOOR AUTO LOCKING DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER DEFAULT SETTING 200 2-2. Instrument cluster Press the SELECT RESET button to customize the items. Items Screen text UNITS Door lock/ unlock warning function KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK Time for automatic door lock function KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER Double switch operation to unlock all the doors KEYLESS ENTRY ALL DOORS UNLOCK Automatic door locking function DOOR AUTO LOCKING Unit A Unit B LAMPS + TONE* LAMPS OFF TONE 60 SECONDS* 120 SECONDS 30 SECONDS OFF 2 PRESSES* SHIFT OUT OF PARK 2 When driving To select Unit A or Unit B (→P. 202) Select in this order 1 PRESS ABOVE 12 MPH* (20 km/h) OFF Automatic door unlocking function DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING Time period before lights turn off (if a door is opened and closed, and engine switch is in ACC or LOCK) HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER Time period before lights turn off COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER Reset to default setting HOLD RESET TO RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS *: SHIFT TO PARK* DRIVER DOOR OPEN OFF 30 SECONDS* 60 SECONDS 0 SECONDS 90 SECONDS 15 SECONDS* 30 SECONDS 8 SECONDS Default setting 201 2-2. Instrument cluster After customize is complete, press the SETUP US/M button to set the selected item. If the customization fails, the previously setting will be displayed. If no button is pressed for 10 seconds, the display change to normal display. n To select the unit A (English/U.S. customary system) or unit B (metric unit) Press the SETUP US/M button to display UNITS on the multi-information display. Press the SELECT RESET button to change the units. Press the INFO or SETUP US/M button and complete the unit change. Information Unit A Unit B Average Fuel Economy and Current Fuel Economy MPG L/100 Km MILES Km MPH Km/h °F °C Distance To Empty Average Speed Outside temperature display on the accessory meter n Feature customization error • If SYSTEM ERROR message is indicated, turn the engine switch off and then on again. • If SYSTEM ERROR message is indicated again, contact your Toyota dealer. CAUTION n Caution while driving Do not adjust the display. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 202 2-2. Instrument cluster NOTICE n The multi-information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. 2 When driving 203 2-2. Instrument cluster Accessory meter Outside temperature display (if equipped) Displays the outside air temperature. (→P. 427) Outside temperature and trip information display (if equipped) Displays the outside temperature and trip information. (→P. 205, 427) Clock (→P. 426) H (Hour) button (→P. 426) M (Minute) button (→P. 426) INFO button (if equipped) SELECT RESET button (if equipped) SETUP US/M button (if equipped) 204 2-2. Instrument cluster Outside temperature and trip information display (if equipped) Every time the INFO button is pushed, the display toggles through these information. l OUTSIDE (outside temperature display) Displays the outside air temperature. 2 l AVG (average fuel consumption after refueling) The function can be reset by pushing the SELECT RESET button for more than 2 seconds. l INST (current fuel consumption) Displays the current rate of fuel consumption. l RANGE (driving range) Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining. • This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. • When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. l Display off 205 When driving Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled. 2-2. Instrument cluster n The accessory meter can be operated when The engine switch must be in the ON position. n To select the unit A (English/U.S. customary system) or unit B (metric unit) (vehicles without multi-information display) Press the SETUP US/M button to change the units. Information Unit A Unit B Average fuel consumption and current fuel consumption MPG L/100 Km MILES Km °F °C Driving range Outside temperature CAUTION n Caution while driving Do not adjust the display. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 206 2-3. Operating the lights and wipers Headlight switch The headlights can be operated manually or automatically. The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all lights listed above turn on. U.S.A. Canada Turning on the high beam headlights With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams. Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off. Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams. Release the lever to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off. 207 When driving The headlights and all listed above turn on and off automatically. (When the engine switch is in the ON position) (if equipped) lights 2 2-3. Operating the lights and wipers n Daytime running light system (if equipped) To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the front turn signal lights turn on automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night. n Headlight control sensor (vehicles with automatic light control system) The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction. n Automatic light off system l When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights automatically turn off after 30 seconds when all doors are closed with the engine switch turned to the ACC or LOCK position. (The lights turn off immediately if the button on the wireless remote control is pressed after all doors are locked.) l When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically with the engine switch turned to the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door is opened. Vehicles with automatic light control system: If any of the doors is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes. To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the ON position, or turn the headlight switch off once and then back to the or position. n Customization l That can be configured at Toyota dealer (vehicles without multi-information display) Settings (automatic light off system) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 633) l It is possible to change the settings (vehicles with multi-information display) (Feature customization →P. 200) 208 2-3. Operating the lights and wipers NOTICE n To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 2 When driving 209 2-3. Operating the lights and wipers Fog light switch (if equipped) The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. OFF ON n The fog lights can be turned on only when The headlights are on low beam. 210 2-3. Operating the lights and wipers Windshield wipers and washer n Without intermittent type Low speed windshield wiper operation High speed windshield wiper operation Temporary operation 2 When driving Washer operation 211 2-3. Operating the lights and wipers n Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when selected). is Intermittent windshield wiper operation Low speed windshield wiper operation High speed windshield wiper operation Temporary operation Intermittent wiper interval adjustment (decrease) Intermittent wiper interval adjustment (increase) 212 2-3. Operating the lights and wipers Washer/wiper dual operation Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts. 2 When driving n The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when The engine switch must be in the ON position. n If no windshield washer fluid sprays Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir. NOTICE n When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield. n When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually. n When a nozzle becomes block Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged. 213 2-4. Using other driving systems Cruise control (if equipped) Use cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator. Indicator Cruise control switch n Set the vehicle speed Press the ON-OFF button to turn the cruise control on. At this time, the cruise control indicator will come on. Press the button once more to deactivate the cruise control. Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and push the lever down to set the cruise control speed. 214 2-4. Using other driving systems n Adjusting the speed setting Increase speed Decrease speed Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is obtained. n Canceling and resuming regular acceleration Cancel Pull the lever towards you to cancel cruise control. The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied. Resume To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up. n Cruise control can be set when l The shift lever is in D or the shift range position must be in 4 or 5 in S mode (5-speed models). l The shift lever is in D or the shift range position must be in between 4 and 6 in S mode (6-speed models). l Vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). n Accelerating The vehicle can be accelerated normally. 215 2 When driving Fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph [1.6 km/h]) can be made by lightly pushing the lever up or down and releasing it. 2-4. Using other driving systems n Automatic cruise control cancellation The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations. l Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed. At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained. l Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h). l VSC is activated. n If the cruise control indicator flashes Press the ON-OFF button to turn the cruise control off, and then reactivate the system. If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. CAUTION n To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use. n Situations unsuitable for cruise control Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or fatal accident. l In heavy traffic l On roads with sharp bends l On winding roads l On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow l On steep hills l When towing a trailer 216 2-4. Using other driving systems Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) The intuitive parking assist is designed to inform you of the approximate distance between your vehicle and an obstruction by indicator and buzzer when parking the vehicle. This system uses sensors to detect obstructions. n Sensor types 2 When driving Back sensors Rear corner sensors Front corner sensors n Intuitive parking assist switch Press the switch to turn on. (To turn off, press the switch again.) When on, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver that the system is operational. At this time, the indicator will come on. 217 2-4. Using other driving systems The distance and buzzer n When a sensor detects an obstacle. The buzzer sounds. Back sensors Distance shown as in in. (mm) Indicator and buzzer Far Approximately 70.9—45.3 (1800—1150) Intermittent Mid Approximately 45.3—33.5 (1150—850) Fast intermittent Near Approximately 33.5 (850) or less Continuous Zone Distance shown as in in. (mm) Indicator and buzzer Far Approximately 33.5—20.5 (850—520) Intermittent Mid Approximately 20.5—15.7 (520—400) Fast intermittent Near Approximately 15.7 (400) or less Continuous Zone Rear corner sensors 218 2-4. Using other driving systems Front corner sensors Indicator and buzzer Far Approximately 23.6—15.7 (600—400) Intermittent Mid Approximately 15.7—9.8 (400—250) Fast intermittent Near Approximately 9.8 (250) or less Continuous n When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously The buzzer system responds to the nearest zone. n When multiple obstacles are detected in front and behind the vehicle at the same time The buzzer will change in the following manner. l If an obstacle has been detected within 15.7 in. (400 mm) of the front or 33.5 in. (850 mm) in rear of the vehicle (a continuous buzzer is sounding), and a new obstacle is detected at the other end of the vehicle, the buzzer will sound 7 times then one continuous buzzer. l If an obstacle has been detected within 15.7 in. (400 mm) of the front or 33.5 in. (850 mm) in rear of the vehicle (a continuous buzzer is sounding), and a new obstacle is detected in the same way at the other end of the vehicle, the buzzer will sound 3 times then one continuous buzzer. 219 2 When driving Distance shown as in in. (mm) Zone 2-4. Using other driving systems Sensors that operate and detection range The following diagrams show the sensor detection range. Note that sensors may not be able to detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle. n Detection range of the sensors Back sensors Rear corner sensors Front corner sensors Perceptible area Approx. 70.9 in. (1800 mm) Approx. 33.5 in. (850 mm) Approx. 23.6 in. (600 mm) The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors may not be able to detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle. The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc. 220 2-4. Using other driving systems n The Intuitive parking assist system can be operated when l Front corner sensors: • The engine switch is in the ON position. • The shift lever is in R. • The shift lever is not in P or R and vehicle speed is approximate 6 mph (10 km/h) or less. l Back and rear corner sensors: 2 • The engine switch is in the ON position. • The shift lever is in R l Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor. A sensor is frozen. A sensor is covered in any way. The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side. On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass. The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves. There is another vehicle equipped with intuitive parking assist sensors in the vicinity. A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain. The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna. A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact. In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather. The area directly under the bumpers is not detected. Objects lower than the sensors or thin stakes etc. may be detected initially, but as they draw closer, they may cease to be detected. A towing hitch is mounted to the vehicle. A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed. When attaching a two-way radio antenna. When the bumper is damaged. 221 When driving n Sensor detection information 2-4. Using other driving systems In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are. l The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles: • • • • • Wires, fences, ropes, etc. Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves Sharply-angled objects Low obstacles Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle • A person near the vehicle (depending on the type of clothes worn) • When the bumper is damaged. n Certification (Canada only) This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001. n If the indicator is continuously on Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. n If the indicator remains blinking but do not sound the buzzer Clean the sensors with soft cloth. . CAUTION n Caution when using the intuitive parking assist Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident. l Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h). l Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range. NOTICE n Notes when washing the vehicle Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning. 222 2-4. Using other driving systems Four-wheel drive system (if equipped) Use the front-wheel drive control switch to select the following transfer modes. *1 *2 2 When driving *1: *2: Vehicles with multi-information display Vehicles without multi-information display 2WD (high speed position, two-wheel drive) Normal driving. 4H (high speed position, four-wheel drive) Greater traction than two-wheel drive. When you experience a loss of power, such as wheel slipping. The 4HI indicator will come on. 4L (low speed position, four-wheel drive) Driving requiring maximum power and traction such as climbing or descending steep hills, off-road driving and hard pulling in sand or mud, etc. The 4LO indicator will come on. 223 2-4. Using other driving systems Shifting between 4H and 4L n Shifting from 4H to 4L Stop the vehicle completely. Shift the shift lever to N. Push and turn the front-wheel drive control switch fully clockwise. Maintain this condition until the 4LO indicator comes on. n Shifting from 4L to 4H Stop the vehicle completely. Shift the shift lever to N. Turn the front-wheel drive control switch fully counterclockwise. Maintain this condition until the 4LO indicator turns off. n Shifting between 2WD and 4H Reduce your speed to less than 62 mph (100 km/h) and set the front drive control switch between 2WD and 4H. When the ambient temperature is 5.0°F (-15°C) or lower, shifting from 2WD to 4H can be performed with the vehicle speed below 43 mph (70 km/h). n If the 4HI indicator blinks l Shifting from 2WD to 4H • If the 4HI indicator continues to blink, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating. • If the 4HI indicator continues to blink and the buzzer sounds, stop the vehicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less than 62 mph (100 km/h). Operate the switch again. l Shifting from 4H to 2WD If the 4HI indicator continues to blink, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive forward or backward in a short distance. 224 2-4. Using other driving systems n If the 4LO indicator light blinks l If the 4LO indicator continues to blink when shifting between 4H and 4L, stop the vehicle completely, move the shift lever to N and operate the switch again. l If the shift lever is moved before the 4LO indicator turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.) To complete the shifting, stop the vehicle completely, return the shift lever to N, and confirm that the shift was completed (The indicator turns on/off). l If the engine coolant temperature is too low, the transfer mode may not be able to be shifted. When the engine is warmer, operate the switch again. If the 4LO indicator light continues to blink even after attempting the above, there may be a malfunction in the engine, the brake system or the fourwheel drive system. In this case, you may not be able to shift between 4H and 4L. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. n Shifting to 4L VSC is automatically turned off. n Four-wheel drive usage frequency You should drive in four-wheel drive for at least 10 miles (16 km) each month. This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated. 225 2 When driving Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the transfer mode. 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION n Caution while driving Never operate the front-wheel drive control switch if the wheels are slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting. n When the vehicle is parked If the shift lever is moved before the 4LO indicator turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.) Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the transfer mode. (→P. 225) 226 2-4. Using other driving systems AUTO LSD system The AUTO LSD system aids traction by using the traction control system to control engine performance and braking when one of the rear wheels begins to spin. The system should be used only when one of the rear wheels spinning occurs in a ditch or rough surface. n System operation The system can be used on 2WD models and in 2WD mode on 4WD models. The AUTO LSD system will be activated with the following two procedures. l Press the VSC OFF switch briefly. At this time, the slip and AUTO LSD indicators will come on. l Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds. At this time, the slip, VSC OFF and AUTO LSD indicators will come on simultaneously. To turn off the system, push the switch again. 227 When driving The system is activated when driving at a speed under 62 mph (100 km/h). 2 2-4. Using other driving systems When the AUTO LSD system is operating Vehicles with multi-information display If the rear wheels spin, the slip indicator flashes to indicate that the AUTO LSD system have been controlled the spinning of the rear wheels. Vehicles without multi-information display n If the engine is turned off and restarted The AUTO LSD system and the indicators are automatically turned off. n If the brake system overheats The system will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time. 228 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION n To avoid an accident l Do not use the AUTO LSD system in conditions other than the above. A much greater steering effort and more careful cornering control will be required. l Do not drive with the AUTO LSD system continuously turned on. 2 When driving 229 2-4. Using other driving systems Driving assist systems To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle. n ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface. n Brake Assist Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation. n VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces. n TRAC (Traction Control) for 2WD models and 2WD mode on 4WD models Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads. n A-TRAC (Active Traction Control) for 4WD mode on 4WD models Maintains drive power and prevents the all wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads. 230 2-4. Using other driving systems When VSC/TRAC/A-TRAC are operating Vehicles with multi-information display A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that VSC is operating. Vehicles without multi-information display If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, or if the rear wheels (2WD models and 2WD mode on 4WD models) or all wheels (4WD mode on 4WD models) spin, the slip indicator flashes to indicate that VSC/TRAC/A-TRAC have been engaged. A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that VSC is operating. 231 2 When driving If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, or if the rear wheels (2WD models and 2WD mode on 4WD models) or all wheels (4WD mode on 4WD models) spin, the slip indicator flashes to indicate that VSC/TRAC/A-TRAC have been engaged. 2-4. Using other driving systems To disable VSC and/or TRAC (2WD models and 2WD mode on 4WD models) If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, VSC and TRAC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. n TRAC OFF mode Press the VSC OFF switch briefly. The slip and AUTO LSD indicators will come on. The system is in TRAC off, AUTO LSD on and VSC on mode. Push the switch again to turn the system back on. n AUTO LSD mode Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds, when the system is in the TRAC OFF mode. The slip, VSC OFF and AUTO LSD indicators will come on. The system is in TRAC off, AUTO LSD on and VSC off mode. n VSC OFF mode Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds, when the system is in the AUTO LSD mode. The slip and VSC OFF indicators will come on. The system is all off mode. 232 2-4. Using other driving systems To disable VSC and A-TRAC (4WD mode on 4WD models) If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, VSC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn VSC and A-TRAC off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds. The system is all off mode. Push the switch again to turn the system back on. n Automatic reactivation of TRAC, A-TRAC and VSC Turning the engine switch off after turning off the TRAC, A-TRAC and VSC systems will automatically re-enable them. n Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, TRAC, A-TRAC, VSC and brake assist system l A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started and just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems. l Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred. • • • • Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated. The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated. n If the brake system overheats TRAC or A-TRAC will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.) 233 When driving The slip and VSC OFF indicators will come on. 2 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or serious injury. n The ABS does not operate effectively when l The limits of the gripping performance have been exceeded. l The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road. n Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal conditions The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations. l When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads l When driving with tire chains l When driving over bumps in the road l When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads n When VSC is activated The slip indicator flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator flashes and a buzzer sounds. n TRAC or A-TRAC may not operate effectively when Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if TRAC or A-TRAC is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost. n Replacing tires Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the appropriate tire pressure level. The ABS and VSC will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle. Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels. 234 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION n Handling of tires and suspension Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction. 2 When driving 235 2-5. Driving information Off-road precautions This vehicle has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Off-road vehicle feature l Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, it has a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. l An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. l It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover. 236 2-5. Driving information CAUTION n Off-road vehicle precautions Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle: l In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving. l Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity. l Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have much better control. l When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis. l Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward. 237 2 When driving l Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. 2-5. Driving information Off-road driving When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles. l Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel. l Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private property. l Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel. l Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads. n Additional information for off-road driving For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico: To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations. l State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments l State Motor Vehicle Bureau l Recreational Vehicle Clubs l U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management 238 2-5. Driving information CAUTION n Off-road driving precautions Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle: l Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places. l Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim. l After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur. l In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving. l When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis. 239 When driving l Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow. 2 2-5. Driving information NOTICE n To prevent the water damage l Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other components does not occur. l Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage. l Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage. l Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities. n When you drive through water If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water. n Inspection after off-road driving l Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components. l Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. 240 2-5. Driving information Cargo and luggage Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load. l Stow cargo and luggage in the rear deck whenever possible. l Be sure all items are secured in place. l Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance. 2 l For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight. When driving Capacity and distribution Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) − (Total weight of occupants) Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit— (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 241 2-5. Driving information (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Example on your vehicle Cargo capacity Total load capacity When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows: B lb. (kg) − A lb. (kg) = C lb. (kg) In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows: C lb. (kg) − D lb. (kg) = E lb. (kg) As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. 242 2-5. Driving information CAUTION n Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment. l Receptacles containing gasoline l Aerosol cans n Storage precautions 2 l Do not stack anything behind the front seats higher than the seat- l Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident. • Driver’s feet • Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) • Instrument panel • Dashboard • Auxiliary box or tray that has no lid l Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during an accident or sudden braking. l Never allow anyone to ride in the rear deck. It is not designed for pas- sengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking or a collision. n Capacity and distribution l Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating. l Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury. 243 When driving backs. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident. 2-5. Driving information Vehicle load limits Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. n Total load capacity: (→P. 594) Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. n Seating capacity: Regular Cab models With front separated type seats— 2 occupants With front bench type seat— 3 occupants Double Cab and CrewMax models With frront separated type seats— 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3) With front bench type seat— 6 occupants (Front 3, Rear 3) Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person. Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do not exceed the total load capacity. n Towing capacity: (→P. 251, 598) Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow. n Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants. n Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 501) 244 2-5. Driving information CAUTION n Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident. 2 When driving 245 2-5. Driving information Winter driving tips Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions. n Pre-winter preparations l Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures. • Engine oil • Engine coolant • Washer fluid l Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte. l Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the rear tires. Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires. n Before driving the vehicle Perform the following according to the driving conditions. l Do not try to forcibly open a window, scrape an outside rear view mirror surface or move a wiper or outside rear view mirror that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. l To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. l Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis. l Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes. 246 2-5. Driving information n When driving the vehicle Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions. n When parking the vehicle Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. 2 n Refueling (Flex-fuel vehicles) l Do not change fuels when the fuel level is 1/4 or less. l Always add at least 2.6 gal. (10 L) of fuel. l After fulling up with fuel, warm up the engine or drive the vehicle for at least 5 minutes or 7 miles (11 km). l Do not accelerate rapidly immediately after refueling. Selecting tire chains Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire size. Side chain 0.2 in. (5 mm) in diameter Cross chain 0.25 in. (6.3 mm) in diameter 247 When driving Observe the following precautions when switching fuels, in order to maintain starting and driving performance. 2-5. Driving information Regulations on the use of snow chains l Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains. l Install the chains on the rear tires. l Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km). n Snow chain installation Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains. l Install and remove tire chains in a safe location. l Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on the front tires. l Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying instructions. CAUTION n Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. l Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle. l Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. l Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h) regardless of the type of snow tires being used. l Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. l 4WD models: Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear. 248 2-5. Driving information CAUTION n Driving with snow chains Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury. l Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower. 2 l Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes. l Avoid sudden turns and braking. NOTICE n Repairing or replacing snow tires Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. n Fitting tire chains The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted. 249 When driving l Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained. 2-5. Driving information Trailer towing Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer. To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. The vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes. Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional requirements such as a towing kits, etc. 250 2-5. Driving information Weight limits Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits. Regular Cab models Model code*1 Engine Driving system GSK50L-TRADKA Standard 2WD Long UCK50L-TRADKA Standard 2WD UCK51L-THADKA Long 4.7L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine UCK55L-TRADKA Standard 4WD UCK56L-THADKA Long GCWR 10000 lb. (4535 kg) Towing capacity 5100 lb. (2310 kg) 5000 lb. (2265 kg) 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 7000 lb. (3175 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 8500 lb. (3855 kg)*3 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 6900 lb. (3125 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 8400 lb. (3810 kg)*3 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 6700 lb. (3035 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 8200 lb. (3715 kg)*3 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 6600 lb. (2990 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*3 251 2 When driving 4.0L V6 (1GR-FE) engine GSK51L-THADKA Bed type 2-5. Driving information Model code*1 Engine Driving system USK50L-TRTDKA Bed type Standard Long 5.7L V8 (3UR-FE) engine USK55L-TRTDKA Standard 252 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8900 lb. (4035 kg)*2 15500 lb. (7030 kg)*3 10400 lb. (4715 kg)*3 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8800 lb. (3990 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10800 lb. (4895 kg)*3 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8700 lb. (3945 kg)*2 15500 lb. (7030 kg)*3 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 15000 lb. 9600 lb. (6800 kg)*3,4 (4350 kg)*3,4 4WD USK56L-THTDKA Towing capacity 15000 lb. 9900 lb. (6800 kg)*3,4 (4490 kg)*3,4 2WD USK51L-THTDKA GCWR Long 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8600 lb. (3900 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10500 lb. (4760 kg)*3 2-5. Driving information Model code*1 Engine Driving system USK55L-TRTDGA Standard 5.7L V8 (3UR-FBE) engine *1 : : *3 : *4 : *2 GCWR Towing capacity 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8700 lb. (3945 kg)*2 15500 lb. (7030 kg)*3 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 15000 lb. 9600 lb. (6800 kg)*3,4 (4350 kg)*3,4 4WD Long 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8600 lb. (3900 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10500 lb. (4760 kg)*3 The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) Without towing package With towing package P275/55R20 tires 253 2 When driving USK56L-THTDGA Bed type 2-5. Driving information Double Cab models Model code*1 Engine 4.0L V6 GSK51L-CRASKA (1GR-FE) engine Driving system Bed type GCWR Towing capacity 2WD Standard 10000 lb. (4535 kg) 4800 lb. (2175 kg) 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 6700 lb. (3035 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*3 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 6600 lb. (2990 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*3 13500 lb. (6120 kg) 8000 lb. (3625 kg) 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 6400 lb. (2900 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 7800 lb. (3535 kg)*3 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 6300 lb. (2855 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 7800 lb. (3535 kg)*3 13500 lb. (6120 kg) 7700 lb. (3490 kg) UCK51L-CRASKA Standard 2WD UCK51L-CRALKA UCK52L-CHASKA Long 4.7L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine UCK56L-CRASKA Standard 4WD UCK56L-CRALKA UCK57L-CHASKA 254 Long 2-5. Driving information Model code*1 Engine Driving system Bed type USK51L-CRTSKA Standard 2WD USK51L-CRTLKA Long 5.7L V8 (3UR-FE) engine USK56L-CRTSKA Standard 4WD USK56L-CRTLKA USK57L-CHTSKA Long USK56L-CRTSGA 5.7L V8 (3UR-FBE) engine USK56L-CRTLGA USK57L-CHTSGA Standard 4WD Long Towing capacity 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8600 lb. (3900 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10600 lb. (4805 kg)*3 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8600 lb. (3900 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10600 lb. (4805 kg)*3 16000 lb. (7255 kg) 10500 lb. (4760 kg) 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10300 lb. (4670 kg)*3 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10300 lb. (4670 kg)*3 16000 lb. (7255 kg) 10200 lb. (4625 kg) 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10300 lb. (4670 kg)*3 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10300 lb. (4670 kg)*3 16000 lb. (7255 kg) 10200 lb. (4625 kg) The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) Without towing package *3: With towing package *1: *2: 255 2 When driving USK52L-CHTSKA GCWR 2-5. Driving information CrewMax models Model code*1 Engine Driving system Bed type UCK51L-PSASKA 2WD UCK51L-PSALKA 4.7L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Short UCK56L-PSASKA 4WD UCK56L-PSALKA 256 GCWR Towing capacity 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 6500 lb. (2945 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 8000 lb. (3625 kg)*3 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 6500 lb. (2945 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 8000 lb. (3625 kg)*3 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 6200 lb. (2810 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 7700 lb. (3490 kg)*3 12000 lb. (5440 kg)*2 6200 lb. (2810 kg)*2 13500 lb. (6120 kg)*3 7700 lb. (3490 kg)*3 2-5. Driving information Model code*1 Engine Driving system Bed type USK51L-PSTSKA 2WD USK51L-PSTLKA USK56L-PSTSKA 4WD USK56L-PSTLKA USK56L-PSTSGA 5.7L V8 (3UR-FBE) engine USK56L-PSTLGA 4WD Short Towing capacity 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8400 lb. (3810 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10400 lb. (4715 kg)*3 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8400 lb. (3810 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10400 lb. (4715 kg)*3 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 14000 lb. (6350 kg)*2 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2 16000 lb. (7255 kg)*3 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) Without towing package *3 : With towing package *1: *2: 257 2 When driving 5.7L V8 (3UR-FE) engine GCWR 2-5. Driving information l The gross trailer weight must never exceed towing capacity described in the table above. l The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR described in the table above. l The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated the Certification Label. l The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR indicated the Certification Label. Towing related term Towing related term Meaning GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue load. (or the king pin weight) GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The maximum allowable gross axle weight. The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear). GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer). Gross trailer weight The sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer. 258 2-5. Driving information Towing related term Towing capacity Meaning The maximum allowable gross trailer weight. Towing capacity is calculated considering base vehicle with necessary vehicle equipment and 150 pound driver. Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the towing capacity, gross trailer weight includes the trailer, cargo and necessary equipment for towing. The load placed on the trailer hitch ball. King pin weight The load placed on the fifth wheel trailer hitch mount. Trailer tongue load l A recommended tongue load or king pin weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below. l In order to ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions. 1. Conventional Towing The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 9 to 11% of the gross trailer weight, not exceeding the following. (Tongue load /Gross trailer weight x 100 = 9 to 11%) If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lbs. (907 kg), it is necessary to use a sway control device with sufficient capacity. If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lbs. (2268 kg), it is necessary to use a weight distributing hitch with sufficient capacity. If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, keep your vehicle level with the ground. 259 When driving Tongue load 2 2-5. Driving information Gross trailer weight Tongue load 2. Fifth wheel Towing The king pin weight is 15 to 25% of the Gross Trailer weight. (King pin weight/Gross trailer weight x 100 = 15 to 25%) CrewMax models: Current fifth wheel trailer designs are not compatible with short bed. The gross trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc. Gross trailer weight King pin weight 260 2-5. Driving information Hitch l If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer. l Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement. l Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer. l Lubricate the hitch ball and king pin with a light coat of grease. 2 Bumper towing (vehicles with steel bumper only) The rear bumper of your vehicle is equipped with a hole to install a trailer ball. The maximum gross trailer weight: 5000 lb. (2268 kg) The gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus cargo weight) when towing with the bumper must never exceed 5000 lb. (2268 kg). 261 When driving l Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle. 2-5. Driving information Selecting trailer ball Use the correct trailer ball for your application. Trailer ball load rating Matches or exceeds the gross trailer weight rating of the trailer. Ball diameter Matches the size of the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size. Trailer class Typical trailer ball size IV 2 5/16 in. II and III 2 in. I 1 7/8 in. Shank length Protrudes beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut at least 2 threads. Shank diameter Matches the ball mount hole diameter size. 262 2-5. Driving information Connecting trailer lights Use the wire harness stored in the rear end under body. 4 pin, 7 pin connectors 2 When driving 4 pin connector 263 2-5. Driving information Trailer towing tips Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The three main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading. Keep the following in mind when towing. l Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the posted towing speed limit. l Before starting out, check the trailer’s light and the vehicle-trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance. l Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle. l Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident. l As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-tovehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length. l Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces. l Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration. l Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making a turn. l Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a larger than normal turning radius. 264 2-5. Driving information l Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to prepare for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel, reduce speed immediately but gradually, and steer straight ahead. Never increase speed. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer will stabilize. l In order to maintain engine braking efficiency when driving on a long steep downgrade, do not use the transmission in D. Transmission shift range position must be in 5 in the S mode (6speed models) or in 4 in the S mode (5-speed models). l Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. (→P. 585) l Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following: Apply the brakes and keep them applied. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load. Apply the parking brake firmly. 265 2 When driving l Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes. 2-5. Driving information Shift into P and turn off the engine. l When restarting after parking on a slope: With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal pressed. Shift into D or R (if reversing). Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes. Have someone retrieve the blocks. n Service connector for towing brake controller (with towing package) Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for the trailer brake controller as shown. Access the service connector. Remove the scuff plate. Remove the clip (screw type) and trim board. Remove the connector cover. n Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup on must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer. 266 2-5. Driving information Coupler Trailer ball n Before towing 2 Check that the following conditions are met: l Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (→P. 615) l All trailer lights work to be legal. l All lights work each time you connect them. l The trailer ball is set up at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer. l The vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue load, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes. l The trailer cargo is securely loaded. l The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes. l Depress TOW/HAUL button (if equipped) n Break-in schedule If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components (such as an engine, transmission, differential and wheel bearing), Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer until it has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km). After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start towing. However, drive the vehicle at a speed of less than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer for another 500 miles (800 km). In addition, avoid full throttle acceleration. 267 When driving l Trailer tires should be inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommendation. 2-5. Driving information n Maintenance l If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. (See “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) l Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km). CAUTION n Trailer towing precautions To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. The vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Follow all the instructions described in this section. Failure to do so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. n Weight limit precautions l The gross trailer weight must never exceed towing capacity. (→P. 251) l The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR. (→P. 251) l The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated the Certification Label. l The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR indicated the Certification Label. l Exceeding the towing capacity, GVWR, GCWR or GAWR can cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries. 268 2-5. Driving information CAUTION n Tongue load or king pin weight l A recommended tongue load or king pin weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below. l In order to ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions. 1.Conventional Towing The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 9 to 11% of the gross trailer weight, not exceeding the following. When driving Gross trailer weight 2 Tongue load (Tongue load/Gross trailer weight x 100 = 9 to 11%) If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lbs. (907 kg), it is necessary to use a sway control device with sufficient capacity. If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lbs.(2268 kg), it is necessary to use a weight distributing hitch with sufficient capacity. If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, keep your vehicle level with the ground. 2.Fifth wheel Towing The king pin weight is 15 to 25% of the Gross Trailer weight. Gross trailer weight King pin weight (King pin weight/Gross trailer weight x 100 = 15 to 25%) CrewMax models: Current fifth wheel trailer designs are not compatible with short bed. 269 2-5. Driving information CAUTION n To avoid accident or injury l Speed limit for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the posted towing speed limit. l Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load capacities. l Do not use cruise control when you are towing. l Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts. l Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency. l Do not tow the vehicle with the temporary spare tire installed. n Hitch Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries. n When towing a trailer l If the gross trailer weight exceeds 1000 lb. (453 kg), trailer brakes are required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations. l Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s braking effectiveness. l Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane. 270 2-5. Driving information NOTICE n When installing a trailer hitch Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage. n Safety chain n Do not directly splice trailer lights Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction. n When towing a fifth wheel trailer Be careful not to hit the cabin or deck by the trailer while making a sharp turn. 271 2 When driving A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in the case that it becomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain installation procedure, ask your Toyota dealer. 2-5. Driving information Dinghy towing Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home. NOTICE n To avoid serious damage to your vehicle Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground. 272 2-5. Driving information 2 When driving 273 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Automatic air conditioning system (if equipped) Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. Control panel Windshield defogger Driver’s side temperature control dial Air conditioning ON/OFF switch Automatic mode Air outlet selection dial Front passenger’s side temperature control dial Fan speed control dial Fan OFF switch Outside air or recirculated air mode 276 Simultaneous mode 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Display Fan speed display Airflow display 3 Front passenger’s side temperature setting display Interior and exterior features Driver’s side temperature setting display Using the automatic mode Press . The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool). The temperature for the driver and front passenger seats can be set separately. 277 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Adjusting the settings n Adjusting the temperature setting Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool). The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed. l Individual mode (the indicator on is on) The temperature for the driver and front passenger seats can be adjusted separately. l Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is off) The driver’s side temperature control dial can be used to adjust the temperature for driver and front passenger seats. n Adjusting the fan speed Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease). The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels) Press 278 to turn the fan off. 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger n Changing the air outlets Turn the air outlet selection dial. The air outlets switch each time either side of air outlet selection dial is turned. 3 Air flow as shown according to the mode selected. , air * *: CrewMax models only When the dial is set to , air flows to the upper body and feet. * 2 *1 *1 *1: Double Cab and CrewMax models only *2: CrewMax models only 279 Interior and exterior features When the dial is set to flows to the upper body. 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger When the dial is set to flows to the feet. * 2 , air *1 *1 1 * : Double Cab and CrewMax models only *2: CrewMax models only When the dial is set to , air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates. * *1 2 *1 *1: Double Cab and CrewMax models only *2: CrewMax models only n Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes Press . The mode switches between (outside air mode) and (recirculated air mode) each time the switch is pressed. 280 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Defogging the windshield Press . The indicator comes on. The air conditioning system control operates automatically. Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air mode. 3 Driver side outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. Turn the knob to open or close the vent. 281 Interior and exterior features Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Front passenger side outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. Turn the knob to open or close the vent. Rear outlets (CrewMax models only) Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. Turn the knob to open or close the vent. 282 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger n Using the automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur. l The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest temperature setting is selected in summer. l Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow. l Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on. n Using the system in recirculated air mode The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period. 3 n Window defogger feature (outside air) mode n When outside temperature approaches 32°F (0°C) The air conditioning system may not operate even when n When the indicator on Press is pressed. flashes and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Toyota dealer. 283 Interior and exterior features Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to in situations where the windows need to be defogged. 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger CAUTION n To prevent the windshield from fogging up Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision. NOTICE n To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped. 284 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Manual air conditioning system (if equipped) Air conditioning ON/OFF switch Driver’s side temperature control dial Outside air or recirculated air mode Front passenger’s side temperature control dial 3 Fan speed control dial Air outlet selection dial Interior and exterior features Adjusting the settings n Adjusting the temperature setting Driver’s side temperature control dial Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool). If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air. For quick cooling, turn the temperature control dial to the MAX A/C position. The air conditioning will automatically turn on and the air intake selector will be set to recirculated air mode. 285 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Front passenger’s side temperature control dial Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool). l Individual mode When the front passenger’s side temperature control dial in a position other than the SYNC position, the temperature for the driver and front passenger seats can be adjusted separately. l Simultaneous mode When the front passenger’s side temperature control dial in SYNC position, turn the driver’s side temperature control dial can be used to adjust the temperature for driver and front passenger seats. n Adjusting the fan speed Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease). Set the dial to OFF to turn the fan off. n Changing the air outlets Turn the air outlet selection dial. The air outlets switch each time either side of air outlet selection dial is turned. 286 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Air flow as shown according to the mode selected. When the dial is set to flows to the upper body. , air * *: CrewMax models only When the dial is set to , air flows to the upper body and feet. *1 *1 *1: Double Cab and CrewMax models only *2: CrewMax models only When the dial is set to flows to the feet. * 2 , air *1 *1 1 * : Double Cab and CrewMax models only *2: CrewMax models only 287 Interior and exterior features *2 3 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger When the dial is set to , air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates. *1 *2 *1 The air intake selector is automatically set to outside air mode. To return the recirculated air mode, press . *1: Double Cab and CrewMax models only *2: CrewMax models only When the dial is set to , air flows to the windshield and side windows. The air intake selector is automatically set to outside air mode. In this position, the air intake selector cannot be changed to the recirculated air mode, press . n Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes Press . The mode switches between (outside air mode) and (recirculated air mode) each time the switch is pressed. 288 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger n If the ambient temperature drops while using the recirculated air mode The air intake mode automatically changes from recirculated air mode to outside air mode after a few minutes. To cancel this function: Press and hold for longer than 2 seconds. To reactivate this function: Turn the engine switch to the LOCK or ACC position. Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets 3 Driver side outlets Turn the knob to open or close the vent. 289 Interior and exterior features Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Front passenger side outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. Turn the knob to open or close the vent. Rear outlets (CrewMax models only) Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. Turn the knob to open or close the vent. 290 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger n For quick clearing of the windshield and side windows Press to turn the air conditioning on. n Using the system in recirculated air mode The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period. n When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C) The air conditioning system may not operate even when n When is pressed. is selected for the air outlets used n When the indicator on Press flashes and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Toyota dealer. CAUTION n To prevent the windshield from fogging up Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision. 291 3 Interior and exterior features For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flowing to the upper body depending on the position of the temperature control dial. 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger NOTICE n To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped. 292 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Outside rear view mirror defoggers and front windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped on Regular Cab and Double Cab models) Clear the outside rear view mirrors using the defogger. Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system On/off Press the button to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. The indicator will come on. The defoggers will automatically turn off after about 15 minutes. Pressing the button again also turns the defoggers off. 3 Interior and exterior features 293 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system On/off Press the button to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. The indicator will come on. The defoggers will automatically turn off after about 15 minutes. Pressing the button again also turns the defoggers off. n The defogger can be operated when The engine switch is in the ON position. n The front windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped) Turning the outside rear view mirror defoggers on will turn the front windshield wiper de-icer on. CAUTION n Outside rear view mirror defoggers The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch them to prevent from burning yourself. n When the front windshield wiper de-icer is on (if equipped) Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you. 294 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Back window, outside rear view mirror defoggers and front windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped on CrewMax models) Clear the back window using the defogger. Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system On/off Press the button to turn on the back window defogger. The indicator will come on. The defoggers will automatically turn off after about 15 minutes. Pressing the button again also turns the defogger off. 3 Interior and exterior features 295 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system On/off Press the button to turn on the back window defogger. The indicator will come on. The defoggers will automatically turn off after about 15 minutes. Pressing the button again also turns the defogger off. n The defogger can be operated when The engine switch is in the ON position. n Outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped) Turning the back window defogger on will turn outside rear view mirror defoggers on. n The front windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped) Turning the back window defogger on will turn the front windshield wiper deicer on. 296 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger CAUTION n Back window defogger The surface of the back window becomes hot. Do not touch it to prevent from burning yourself. n Outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped) The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch them to prevent from burning yourself. n When the front windshield wiper de-icer is on (if equipped) Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you. 3 Interior and exterior features 297 3-2. Using the audio system Audio system (without navigation system) Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. Type A: CD player with external CD changer controller and AM/FM radio Type B and C: CD player with changer and AM/FM radio Type A Type B 298 3-2. Using the audio system Type C 3 Page Using the radio P. 301 Using the CD player P. 307 Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 314 Optimal use of the audio system P. 323 Using the AUX adapter P. 325 Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 327 Interior and exterior features Title n Using cellular phones Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating. 299 3-2. Using the audio system CAUTION n For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada l Part 15 of the FCC Rules FCC Warning: Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device. l Laser products • Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself. This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages. • This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. NOTICE n To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine is off. n To avoid damaging the audio system Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system. 300 3-2. Using the audio system Using the radio Power Volume Station selector Text message display (SAT mode) Frequency seek Frequency adjust (AM, FM mode) or channel (SAT mode) 3 Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) Search for desired stations by turning “∧” or “∨” on or pressing . Press and hold the button (from or to or ) that the station is to be set to until you hear a beep. 301 Interior and exterior features Station scan AM·SAT/FM mode buttons 3-2. Using the audio system Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) n Scanning the preset radio stations Press and hold until you hear a beep. Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each. When the desired station is reached, press the button once again to stop scanning. n Scanning all radio stations within range Press . All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each. When the desired station is reached, press the button once again to stop scanning. XM® Satellite Radio (type B and C) n Receiving XM® Satellite Radio Press and select the XM® band. The display changes as follows each time is pressed. AM → SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3 Turn to select the desired channel in all categories or press “∧” or “∨” on the current category. 302 to select the desired channel in 3-2. Using the audio system n Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets Select the desired channel. Press and hold the button (from or to or ) that the channel is to be set to until you hear a beep. n Changing the channel category Press “∧” or “∨” on the . n Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels 3 l Scanning channels in the current category . When the desired channel is reached, press to stop scanning. again l Scanning preset channels Press and hold until you hear a beep. When the desired channel is reached, press to stop scanning. again n Displaying text information Press . The display will show up to 10 characters. 303 Interior and exterior features Press 3-2. Using the audio system The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed. l CH NAME l TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE) l NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE) l CH NUMBER n When the battery is disconnected Stations presets are erased. n Reception sensitivity l Objects, especially metal objects, such as cargo, a camper, or a truck rack, may adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio. l Maintaining stable radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna and differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc. l The radio antenna is mounted on the right-side front fender. The antenna can be removed from the base by turning it. n XM® Satellite Radio (type B and C) An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces. l XM® subscriptions For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe: U.S.A.— Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-967-2346. Canada— Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677. l Radio ID You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem. Select “CH000” using ID number will appear. 304 , and the receiver’s 8-character 3-2. Using the audio system l Satellite tuner The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio. *:Terms and services provided by XM® Satellite Radio are subject to change without notice. n If the satellite radio does not operate normally (type B and C) If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action. ANTENNA 3 There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer. Interior and exterior features UPDATING The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM® antenna cable is attached securely. You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels. The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite Radio. NO SIGNAL The XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal. LOADING The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information. OFF AIR The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel. 305 3-2. Using the audio system ----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed. --- The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada). n Certifications for the radio tuner This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following: l Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna. l Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver. l Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTICE n To prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases. l The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage. l A cover will be put on the vehicle. 306 3-2. Using the audio system Using the CD player Power Volume CD selection (with external CD changer only for Type A) Fast-forward Reverse CD insert (Type B and C) CD eject 3 Track selection Repeat play Playback Interior and exterior features Random playback Display text message Search playback Loading CDs n Loading a CD (type A) Insert a CD. n Loading a CD (type B and C) Press . WAIT is shown on the display. Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green. The display changes from WAIT to LOAD. 307 3-2. Using the audio system n Loading multiple CDs (type B and C) Press and hold until you hear a beep. WAIT is shown on the display. Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green. The display changes from WAIT to LOAD. The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted. Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green again. Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs. To stop the operation, press . Ejecting CDs n Ejecting a CD (type A) Press and remove the CD. n Ejecting a CD (type B and C) To select the CD to be ejected. Type B: Press or . Type C: Press or . The number of the CD selected is shown on the display. Press and remove the CD. n Ejecting all the CDs (type B and C) Press and hold CDs. 308 until you hear a beep, and then remove the 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting and scanning CDs (with CD changer only) n Selecting the desired CD or Type A and B: Press or Type C: Press . . n Scanning loaded CDs Press and hold until you hear a beep. The first 10 seconds of the first track on each CD will be played. 3 Press the button again when the desired CD is reached. n Selecting a track Press “∧” to move up or “∨” to move down using until the desired track number is displayed. n Scanning tracks Press . The first 10 seconds of each track will be played. Press the button again when the desired track is reached. Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks To fast-forward or reverse. Type A and B: Press and hold Type C: Press and hold or or . . 309 Interior and exterior features Selecting and scanning tracks 3-2. Using the audio system Repeat play n Repeating a track Press or . n Repeating all of the tracks on a CD (with CD changer only) Press and hold or until you hear a beep. Random playback n Current CD Press or . Tracks are played in random order until the button is pressed once more. n All CDs (with CD changer only) Press and hold or until you hear a beep. Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order until the button is pressed once more. Switching the display Press . Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./Elapsed time→CD title→Track name. 310 3-2. Using the audio system n Display Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time. If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding for 1 second or more will display the remaining characters. A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed. If is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters. Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all. 3 n Canceling random playback or Interior and exterior features Press again. n Canceling repeat play Press or again. n Error messages “ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down. n Discs that can be used Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration. CDs with copy-protect features may not playback. n CD player protection feature To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used. 311 3-2. Using the audio system n If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods CDs may be damaged and may not play properly. n Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player. NOTICE n CDs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc. Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function. l Type A: CDs that have a diameter that is not 3 in. (8 cm) or 4.7 in. (12 cm) l Type B and C: CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm) l Low-quality and deformed CDs l CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area 312 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE l CDs that have had tape, stickers or CDR labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off n CD player precautions Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself. 3 l Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot. l Do not apply oil to the CD player. l Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player. l Do not insert more than one CD at a time 313 Interior and exterior features l Store CDs away from direct sunlight. 3-2. Using the audio system Playing back MP3 and WMA discs Power Disc selection (Type B and C) Volume Reverse Fast-forward Disc insert (Type B and C) Disc eject Folder selection File selection Random playback Repeat play Display text message Playback Search playback Loading MP3 and WMA discs n Loading a disc (type A) Insert a disc. n Loading a disc (type B and C) Press . WAIT is shown on the display. Insert a disc when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green. The display changes from WAIT to LOAD. 314 3-2. Using the audio system n Loading multiple discs (type B and C) Press and hold until you hear a beep. WAIT is shown on the display. Insert a disc when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green. The display changes from WAIT to LOAD. The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the disc is inserted. Insert the next disc when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green again. Repeat the procedure for the remaining discs. To stop the operation, press 3 . Interior and exterior features Ejecting MP3 and WMA discs n Ejecting a disc (type A) Press and remove the disc. n Ejecting a disc (type B and C) To select the disc to be ejected. Type B: Press or . Type C: Press or . The number of the disc selected is shown on the display. Press and remove the disc. n Ejecting all the discs (type B and C) Press and hold discs. until you hear a beep, and then remove the 315 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting a disc (type B and C) n Selecting the desired disc Type B: Press or . Type C: Press or . Selecting and scanning folders n Selecting folders one at a time To select the desired folder, press “∧” or “∨” on or . n Scanning the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder Press and hold until you hear a beep. The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played. When the desired folder is reached, press the button once again. n Returning to the first folder Press and hold “∨” on or until you hear a beep. To select the desired file, turn the or press “∧” or “∨” on Selecting and scanning files n Selecting one file at a time . 316 3-2. Using the audio system n Scanning the desired file by cueing the files in the folder Press . The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played. When the desired file is reached, press the button once again. Fast-forwarding and reversing files To fast-forward or reverse. Type A and B: Press and hold or . 3 Type C: Press and hold or . Interior and exterior features Repeat play n Repeating a file Press or . n Repeating all of the files in the folder Press and hold or until you hear a beep. Random playback n Playing files from a particular folder in random order Press or . n Playing all of the files on a disc in random order Press and hold or until you hear a beep. 317 3-2. Using the audio system Switching the display Press . Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the order of Folder no./File no./Elapsed time→Folder name→File name→Album title (MP3 only)→Track title→Artist name. n Display Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time. If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding or more will display the remaining characters. A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed. If for 1 second is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters. Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all. n Canceling random playback Press or again. n Canceling repeat play Press or again. n Error messages “ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the disc or inside the player. The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down. “NO MUSIC”:This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the disc. 318 3-2. Using the audio system n Discs that can be used Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration. n MP3 and WMA player protection feature To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the MP3 and WMA player is being used. n If discs are left inside the MP3 and WMA player or in the ejected position for extended periods 3 Discs may be damaged and may not play properly. n Lens cleaners n MP3 and WMA files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows Media® Audio) is a Microsoft® audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used. 319 Interior and exterior features Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the MP3 and WMA player. 3-2. Using the audio system l MP3 file compatibility • Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3) • Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps) • Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural l WMA file compatibility • Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 • Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps) l Compatible media Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CDRWs. Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints. 320 3-2. Using the audio system l Compatible disc formats The following disc formats can be used. • Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2 • File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows. • Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels • Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters • Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root) • Maximum number of files per disc: 255 l File names 3 l Multi-sessions As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played. l ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags. l MP3 and WMA playback When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not save any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data, only music data can be played. 321 Interior and exterior features The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma. 3-2. Using the audio system l Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers. l Playback • To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. • CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc. • There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows Media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. NOTICE n CDs and adapters that cannot be used (→P. 312) n CD player precautions (→P. 313) 322 3-2. Using the audio system Optimal use of the audio system Displays the current mode Changes the following settings l Sound quality and volume balance The sound quality and balance settings can be changed to produce the best sound. l Automatic Sound Levelizer on/off (→P. 324) Using the audio control function n Changing sound quality modes Pressing selects the mode to be changed in the following order. BAS → MID*1 → TRE → FAD → BAL → ASL → RSE*2 *1: Type C only *2: Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system n Adjusting sound quality Turning adjusts the level. 323 Interior and exterior features l Rear seat entertainment system lock on/off (→P. 324) 3 3-2. Using the audio system Mode displayed Sound quality mode Level Turn to the left Turn to the right BAS Bass* -5 to 5 MID Mid-range* (type C only) -5 to 5 Low High TRE Treble* -5 to 5 FAD Front/rear volume balance R7 to F7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front BAL Left/right volume balance L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right *: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or CD mode. n Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) When ASL is selected, turning to the right changes the amount of ASL in the order of LOW, MID and HIGH. Turning to the left turns ASL off. ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed. n Setting the rear seat entertainment system lock (if equipped) When RSE is selected, turn until ON/OFF is displayed. The rear seat entertainment system lock remains on, even when the engine switch is turned off. 324 3-2. Using the audio system Using the AUX adapter This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers. Connect the portable audio device. 3 Interior and exterior features Press . 325 3-2. Using the audio system n Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself. n When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet or cigarette lighter Noise may occur during playback. Use the battery power source of the portable audio device to reduce noise. 326 3-2. Using the audio system Using the steering wheel audio switches (if equipped) Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel. Volume Radio: Select radio stations CD: Select tracks, files (MP3 and WMA) and discs Power on, source select audio 3 Turning on the power when the audio system is turned off. The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until the system turns off. Changing the audio source Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows, each time is pressed. CD player without changer: FM1 → FM2 → CD → AUX → AM CD player with changer: FM1 → FM2 → CD changer → AUX → AM → SAT1* → SAT2* → SAT3* *: Type B and C 327 Interior and exterior features Press 3-2. Using the audio system Adjusting the volume Press “+” on volume. to increase the volume and “–” to decrease the Press and hold “+” or “–” on the volume. to continue increasing or decreasing Selecting a radio station Press to select the radio mode. Press “∧” or “∨” on to select a preset station. To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear a beep. Selecting a track/file Press to select the CD mode. Press “∧” or “∨” on to select the desired track/file. Selecting a disc in the CD player (CD player with changer only) Press to select the CD mode. Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on set. until you want to listen to is CAUTION n To reduce the risk of an accident Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel. 328 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Rear seat entertainment system (if equipped) The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio system. Front separated type seats 3 Interior and exterior features Power outlet main switch Front audio system DVD player Display Rear seat entertainment system remote controller A/V input adapter Power outlet 329 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Front bench type seat Power outlet main switch Front audio system DVD player Display Rear seat entertainment system remote controller Power outlet A/V input adapter 330 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Opening and closing the display Press the lock release button to open the display. Pull the display down to an easily viewable angle (between 90° and 125°). To close the display, push the display up until a click is heard. Loading a disc Insert the disc into the slot with the label side up. The DISC indicator light turns on while the disc is loaded. The player will play the track or chapter, and will repeat it after it reaches the end. 331 Interior and exterior features The illumination of the screen is automatically turned off when the display is closed. However, the rear seat entertainment system is not turned off. 3 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Ejecting a disc Press disc. and remove the n The rear seat entertainment system can be used when The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position. n Discs that can be used Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration. n When appears on the screen It indicates that the selected switch cannot work. n Rear seat entertainment system lock →P. 324 n Error messages DISC CHECK: Indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged or was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. REGION CODE ERROR:Indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly. DVD ERROR: 332 Indicates that there is a problem inside the player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again. If the malfunction still exists, take the vehicle to your Toyota dealer. 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system n Before using the remote controller (for new vehicle owners) Remove the cover. Remove the insulating sheet. 3 Remove the depleted batteries and install 3 new AA batteries. n If the remote controller batteries are discharged The following symptoms may occur. l The rear seat entertainment system control will not function properly. l The operational range is reduced. n When replacing the AA batteries Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, electric appliance shop, or camera stores. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Toyota dealer. Dispose of used batteries according to local laws. 333 Interior and exterior features n When the remote controller battery is fully depleted 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system n Headphones With some headphones generally available in the market, sound quality may be poor. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota genuine wireless headphones. Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details. n Volume Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind. CAUTION n While driving Do not use headphones. Doing so may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. n When the rear seat entertainment system is not used Keep the display closed. In the event of an accident or sudden braking, the opened display may hit an occupant’s body, resulting in injury. n To prevent accidents and electric shock Do not disassemble or modify the remote controller. n When the remote controller is not used Stow the remote controller. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. n Removed batteries and other parts Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking. 334 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system NOTICE n For normal operation after replacing the batteries Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. l Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. l Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote controller. l Do not bend any of the battery terminals. 3 Interior and exterior features 335 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Using the DVD player (DVD video) n Remote controller Turning on the DVD mode Turning on/off the control icon screen Selecting a chapter Reversing a disc Turning on the menu screen Turning on the title selection screen Searching the title Changing the screen angle Inputting the selected control icon Turning off the screen Selecting a control icon Playing/pausing a disc Fast-forwarding a disc Stopping a disc Changing the subtitle language Changing the audio language 336 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system n Unit Ejecting a disc Turning on the DVD mode Skipping chapter to the desired Playing/pausing a disc Turning on/off the control icon screen Selecting a control icon Inputting the selected control icon 3 Interior and exterior features 337 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system n Control icon screen (Page1) Turning off the control icon screen on the screen Displaying control screen page 2 icon Turning on/off the title selection screen for the disc Turning on/off the menu screen for the disc Reversing a disc Stopping a disc Playing/pausing a disc Fast-forwarding a disc n Control icon screen (Page2) Displaying the initial setting screen Displaying control screen page 1 icon Searching the title Returning to the previous screen Changing the audio language Changing the subtitle language Changing the angle 338 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system NOTICE n Cleaning the screen Wipe the screen with a dry soft cloth. If the screen is wiped with a rough cloth, the surface of the screen may be scratched. n To prevent damage to the remote controller l Keep the remote controller away from direct sunlight, heat and high humidity. l Do not drop or knock the remote controller against hard objects. l Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote controller. n DVD player 3 Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot. Press or Press or icon screen. to turn on the control icon screen. once again or select to turn off the control Turning on the title selection screen Press or select to turn on the title selection screen. For the operation of the title selection screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc. Turning on the menu screen Press or select to turn on the menu screen. For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc. 339 Interior and exterior features Turning on/off the control icon screen 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Returning to the previous screen Select to return to the previous screen. For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc. Searching for a title Press or select to display the screen to search for a title. Select the title number, and press or to input it. Select to return to the previous screen. Changing the subtitle language Press or select to display the subtitle language screen. Each time is pressed or is selected, another language stored on the disc is selected. Select to return to the previous screen. 340 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Changing the audio language Press or select to display the audio language screen. Each time is pressed or is selected, another language stored on the disc is selected. Select to return to the previous screen. 3 Changing the angle Each time is pressed or is selected, the angle changes. Select to return to the previous screen. 341 Interior and exterior features Press or select to display the screen to change the angle. 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system n DVD player and DVD video discs This DVD player is compatible with NTSC color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to other formats such as PAL or SECAM cannot be used. n Region codes Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating where you can use them. If the DVD video disc is not labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc in this player, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc does not have a region code, in some cases you cannot use it. n Marks shown on DVD video discs Indicates NTSC format of color TV. Indicates the number of audio tracks. Indicates the number of language subtitles. Indicates the number of angles. Indicates the screen to be selected. Wide screen: 16:9 Standard: 4:3 Indicates regions in which this video disc can be played. All: all countries Number: region code 342 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system n DVD video disc glossary l DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Discs that hold world’s standard video. DVD video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/ 40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology has been adopted in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format. Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video. l Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes. l Multi-language feature: Allows you to select the language of the subtitles and audio. l Region codes: Region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player. l Audio: This DVD player can play liner PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio format DVD. Other decoded type cannot be played. l Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs are divided into sections by title and chapter. l Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title. l Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title comprises multiple chapters. 343 Interior and exterior features • Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played. • Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played. • Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played. l Multi-angle feature: Allows you to enjoy the same scene at different angles. 3 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system n Audio Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Dolby Digital”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. © 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. “dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. 344 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Using the DVD player (video CD) n Remote controller Turning on the DVD mode Turning on/off the control icon screen Selecting a chapter Reversing a disc Searching the disc menu number Inputting the selected control icon Turning off the screen 3 Selecting a control icon Interior and exterior features Playing/pausing a disc Fast-forwarding a disc Stopping a disc Changing the initial setting n Unit Ejecting a disc Turning on the DVD mode Skipping chapter to the desired Playing/pausing a disc Turning on/off the control icon screen Selecting a control icon Inputting the selected control icon 345 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system n Control icon screen (Page1) Selecting a disc menu number Turning off the menu screen Displaying control screen page 2 icon Turning on the disc menu Returning to the previous page screen (with the disc menu displayed) Proceeding to the next page screen (with the disc menu displayed) Changing to a multiplex trasmission n Control icon screen (Page2) Displaying control screen page 1 Reversing a disc Playing/pausing a disc Fast-forwarding a disc Selecting a disc menu number Select to display the disc menu number search screen. Select the disc menu number, and press Select 346 to return to the previous screen. or to input it. icon 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Using the DVD player (audio CD/CD text) n Control screen Press or to display the control screen. Repeat play Random playback Search playback Repeat play 3 n Repeating a track Interior and exterior features Select . Random playback n Playing all of the tracks on a CD in random order Select . Search playback n Scanning tracks Select . The first 10 seconds of each track will be played. Select again when the desired track is reached. n Canceling repeat play and random playback Select or once again. 347 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Using the DVD player (MP3 discs) n Control screen Press or to display the control screen. Repeat play Random playback Search playback Displaying file information Selecting a folder Repeat play n Repeating a file Select . n Repeating all of the files in the folder Select , and press and hold or . Random playback n Playing files from a particular folder in random order Select . n Playing all of the files on a disc in random order Select 348 , and press and hold or . 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Selecting and scanning folders n Selecting folders one at a time To select the desired folder, select or . n Scanning the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder Select , and press and hold or . The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played. When the desired folder is reached, select again. once n Scanning the desired file by cueing the files in the folder Select . The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played. When the desired file is reached, select once again. Displaying file information. Select . n Canceling repeat play and random playback Select or once again. 349 Interior and exterior features Scanning files 3 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Using the video mode Press or the video mode. to select Before switching to the video mode, connect the audio source to the A/V input adapter. Using the A/V input adapter Front separated type seats Open the cover. The A/V input adapter is composed of 3 input adapters. Yellow: Image input adapter White: Left channel audio input adapter Red: Right channel audio input adapter Front bench type seat Open the cover. The A/V input adapter is composed of 3 input adapters. Yellow: Image input adapter White: Left channel audio input adapter Red: Right channel audio input adapter 350 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system n A/V input adapter The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audiovisual equipment is connected to the A/V input adapter. For details, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions. n Power outlet The power outlet can be used to connect the audio-visual device. (→P. 432, 437) NOTICE n When the A/V input adapter is not in use 3 351 Interior and exterior features Keep the A/V input adapter cover closed. Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical failure or a short circuit. 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Changing the Setup Menu settings Press display screen. or select the initial to setting The following settings can be customized here. l Audio language l Subtitle language l DVD language l Angle mark l Parental lock Changing the audio language Select . Select the language you want to hear, and press input it. 352 or to 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Select if you cannot find the language you would like to hear. Enter the appropriate 4-digit language code. (→P. 357) Select a number, and press or to input it. If a code that is not in the list is entered, “Incorrect Code” will appear on the screen. 3 Changing the subtitle language . Select the language you would like to read, and press or to input it. Select if you cannot find the language you would like to read. Enter the appropriate 4-digit language code. (→P. 357) Select a number, and press or to input it. If a code that is not in the list is entered, “Incorrect Code” will appear on the screen. 353 Interior and exterior features Select 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Changing the DVD language Select . Select the language you would like to hear and press or to input it. Select if you cannot find the language you would like to hear. Enter the appropriate 4-digit language code. (→P. 357) Select a number, and press or to input it. If a code that is not in the list is entered, “Incorrect Code” will appear on the screen. Turning on/off the angle mark The angle mark can be turned on for discs that are multi-angle compatible. Each time you press angle mark turns on or off. 354 or when is selected, the 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Setting viewer restriction levels Setting a personal code allows the viewer restriction to be used. Select . Enter a personal code and press or . The setting cannot be changed unless a personal code is entered. When you forget a personal code, initialize a personal code. (→P. 357) and press or . The smaller the level number, the stricter the restrictions. Initializing all menus Select . Turning off the Setup Menu screen Select . 355 Interior and exterior features Select a restriction level (1-8), 3 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Setting the display mode Pressing changes the display mode sequentially as follows: Normal → Wide 1 → Wide 2 Returning to the previous screen Select 356 to return to the previous screen. 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system n To initialize the password Press on the remote controller or unit ten times when the Enter Personal Code screen is displayed. n Language code list Language English French German Italian Spanish Chinese Dutch Portuguese Swedish Russian Korean Greek Afar Abkhazian Afrikaans Amharic Arabic Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Byelorussian Bulgarian Code 0208 0209 0214 0215 0218 0301 0315 0319 0325 0401 0426 0515 0520 0521 0601 0609 0610 0615 0625 0701 0704 0712 0714 Language Bihari Bislama Bengali Tibetan Breton Catalan Corsican Czech Welsh Danish Bhutani Esperanto Estonian Basque Persian Finnish Fiji Faroese Frisian Irish Scots-Gaelic Galician Guarani 3 Interior and exterior features Code 0514 0618 0405 0920 0519 2608 1412 1620 1922 1821 1115 0512 0101 0102 0106 0113 0118 0119 0125 0126 0201 0205 0207 357 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Code 0721 0801 0809 0818 0821 0825 0901 0905 0911 0914 0919 0923 1001 1009 1023 1101 1111 1112 1113 1114 1119 1121 1125 1201 1214 1215 1220 1222 1307 1309 358 Language Gujarati Hausa Hindi Croatian Hungarian Armenian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiak Indonesian Icelandic Hebrew Japanese Yiddish Javanese Georgian Kazakh Greenlandic Cambodian Kannada Kashmiri Kurdish Kirghiz Latin Lingala Laothian Lithuanian Latvian Malagasy Maori Code 1311 1312 1314 1315 1318 1319 1320 1325 1401 1405 1415 1503 1513 1518 1601 1612 1619 1721 1813 1814 1815 1823 1901 1904 1907 1908 1909 1911 1912 1913 Language Macedonian Malayalam Mongolian Moldavian Marathi Malay Maltese Burmese Nauru Nepali Norwegian Occitan (Afan) Oromo Oriya Punjabi Polish Pashto, Pushto Quechua Rhaeto-Romance Kirundi Romanian Kinyarwanda Sanskrit Sindhi Sangho Serbo-Croatian Sinhalese Slovak Slovenian Samoan 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system Language Shona Somali Albanian Serbian Siswati Sesotho Sundanese Swahili Tamil Telugu Tajik Thai Tigrinya Turkmen Tagalog Code 2014 2015 2018 2019 2020 2023 2111 2118 2126 2209 2215 2315 2408 2515 2621 Language Setswana Tonga Turkish Tsonga Tatar Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapük Wolof Xhosa Yoruba Zulu 3 n Adjusting the screen Press . Select the brightness, contrast, tone or color, and make adjustments. Press or “-” or “Red” or to input it. “+” or “Green” Brightness Darkens Brightens Contrast Weakens the contrast Strengthens the contrast Tone Weakens the tone Strengthens the tone Color Strengthens the red color Strengthens the green color 359 Interior and exterior features Code 1914 1915 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1923 2001 2005 2007 2008 2009 2011 2012 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) (if equipped) This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you connect a cellular phone without using cables and to make or receive calls without operating the cellular phone buttons. Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. Title Page Using the hands-free phone system P. 364 Making a phone call P. 372 Setting a cellular phone P. 377 Security and system setup P. 382 Using the phone book P. 386 n When using the hands-free system l The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call. l If both parties speak at the same time it may be difficult to hear. l If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard. l Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking. l In the following circumstances it may be difficult to hear the other party: • • • • • 360 If driving on unpaved roads If driving at high speeds If a window is open If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone If the air conditioning fan speed is set to high 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) n Conditions under which the system will not operate l If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth® l If the cellular phone is switched off l If you are outside service range l If the cellular phone is not connected l If the cellular phone’s battery is low n Bluetooth® antenna The antenna is built into the display. If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate. n Signal status 3 This display may not correspond exactly with the cellular phone itself. n About Bluetooth® n Compatible models Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 and OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1. If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth® phone. If your cellular phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth® phone. 361 Interior and exterior features Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) n Certification for the hands-free phone system FCC ID: HYQBTAU01A IC ID: 1551A-BTAU01A MADE IN MEXICO This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. l Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 362 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 20 cm and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs). Co-location: 3 This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Interior and exterior features CAUTION n Caution while driving Do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone. NOTICE n When leaving the vehicle Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the phone. 363 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Using the hands-free phone system n Audio unit Displays Bluetooth® connection condition If “BT” is not displayed, the hands-free phone system cannot be used. Displays the reception level Displays such items as numbers, names, messages and menu items Press and hold: Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the screen Selects speed dials Selects items such as numbers or menu items Turn: Selects an item Press: Inputs the selected item 364 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) n Steering wheel telephone switches Volume The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted by using this switch. Hands-free phone system off/ends a call/refuses a call Hands-free phone system on/starts a call Press: Voice command system on Press and hold: Voice command system off 3 Interior and exterior features n Microphone 365 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Operating the system by using a voice command By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, you can speak voice commands aloud to control the hands-free phone system without looking at the display or operating . n Operation procedure when using voice commands Press and say a voice command for a desired function. (→P. 367) n Auxiliary commands when using a voice command The following auxiliary voice commands can be used at any time when operating the system using voice commands: “Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction “Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure “Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system “Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function Using the hands-free phone system for the first time Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular phone: Press or . The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are heard. 366 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Register a phone name by either of the following methods. a. Select “(RECORD NAME)” by using , and say aloud the name you would like to register for the phone. b. Press and say aloud the name you would like to reg- ister for the phone. You will hear voice guidance instructing you to confirm the input. Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . A passkey is displayed and heard, and voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard. Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone. Guidance for registration completion is heard. Menu list of the hands-free phone system n Voice commands (MENU ITEMS) First menu Second menu Third menu Operation detail Dial by name - - Dialing by inputting a name registered in the phone book Dial by number - - Dialing by inputting a phone number Redial (REDIAL) - - Dialing a phone number stored in the outgoing history memory 367 Interior and exterior features Input the passkey into the cellular phone. 3 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) First menu Second menu Third menu Operation detail Callback (CALLBACK) - - Dialing a phone number stored in the incoming history memory By voice (BY VOICE) Add entry (ADD ENTRY) By phone (BY PHONE) Call history (CALL HISTORY) Adding a new phone number (MANUAL INPUT) Phone book (PHONE BOOK) 368 Change name (CHANGE NAME) - Changing the name of a phone number in the phone book List names (LIST NAMES) - Listing the phone book data Set speed dial (SPEED DIAL) - Registering a speed dial Delete entry (DELETE ENTRY) - Deleting the phone book data Delete speed dial (DEL SPD DIAL) - Deleting a registered speed dial 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) First menu Second menu Security (SECURITY) Phone setup (PHONE SETUP) (SYSTEM SETUP) Operation detail Set PIN (SET PIN) Setting a PIN Phone book lock (PHBK LOCK) Locking the phone book Phone book unlock (PHBK UNLOCK) Unlocking the phone book Pair phone (PAIR PHONE) Registering a cellular phone to be used Select phone (SELECT PHONE) Selecting a cellular phone to be used Change name (CHANGE NAME) Changing a registered name of a cellular phone List phones (LIST PHONES) Listing the registered cellular phones Set passkey (SET PASSKEY) Changing the passkey Delete (DELETE) Deleting a registered cellular phone (GUIDANCE VOL) Setting voice guidance volume (INITIALIZE) Initialization 3 369 Interior and exterior features Setup (SETUP) Third menu 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) n Using a short cut voice command First menu Second menu Operation detail Dial “XXX (name)” - Dialing a phone number registered in the phone book Phone book add entry - Adding a new phone number Phone book change name - Changing the name of a phone number in the phone book Phone book list names - Listing the phone book data Phone book set speed dial - Registering speed dial Phone book delete entry - Deleting phone book data Phone book delete speed dial - Deleting speed dial Phone book 370 Phone book unlock Unlocking the phone book Phone book lock Locking the phone book 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) n Automatic adjustment of volume When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less. n When using a voice command l For numbers, speak a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound), ∗ (star), and + (plus). l Speak the command correctly and clearly. n The system may not recognize your voice in the following situations: l When driving on a rough road l When driving at high speeds 3 l When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone Interior and exterior features l When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise n The following cannot be performed while driving: l Operating the system with l Registering a cellular phone to the system n Changing the passkey →P. 380 371 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Making a phone call n Making a phone call l Dialing by inputting a phone number “Dial by number” l Dialing by inputting a name “Dial by name” l Speed dialing l Dialing a phone number stored in the outgoing history memory “Redial” l Dialing a phone number stored in the incoming history memory “Callback” n Receiving a phone call l Answering the phone l Refusing the call n Transferring a call n Using a call history memory l Dialing l Storing data in the phone book l Deleting Dialing by inputting a phone number 372 Press and say “Dial by number”. Press and say the phone number. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press . b. Press and say “Dial”. c. Select “Dial” by using . Dialing by inputting a name Press and say “Dial by name”. Select a registered name to be input by either of the following methods: and say a registered name. b. Press and say “List names”. Press while the desired name is being read aloud. Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press b. Press . and say “Dial”. c. Select “Dial” by using . 373 Interior and exterior features a. Press 3 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Speed dialing Press . Press the preset button in which the desired phone number is registered. Press . When receiving a phone call n Answering the phone Press . n Refusing the call Press . Transferring a call A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or conversing a call. Use one of the following methods: a. Operate the cellular phone. Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone. b. Press *1 c. Press and say “Call Transfer” *2. *1 : This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the cellular phone to the system during a call. *2: 374 . While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from the system to the cellular phone. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Using a call history memory Follow the procedure below to use a phone number stored in call history memory: Press and say “Redial” (when using a phone number stored in the outgoing history memory) or “Callback” (when using a phone number stored in the incoming history memory). Select the phone number by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired phone number is displayed. . The following operations can be performed: Dialing: Press or select “Dial” by using a voice command or . Storing the phone number in the phone book: Select “Store” by using a voice command or . Deleting: Select “Delete” by using a voice command or . 375 Interior and exterior features b. Select the desired phone number by using 3 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) n A shortcut to Redial is available Press the twice. n Muting your voice Your voice can be muted so that the other party cannot hear your voice during a call. To set or cancel: Press and say “Mute”. n Call history Up to 5 phone numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming history memories. n When talking on the phone l Do not talk simultaneously with the other party. l Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase. 376 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Setting a cellular phone Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following function can be used for registered cellular phones: n Functions and operation procedures To enter a menu for each function, follow the steps below by using voice commands or : l Registering a cellular phone 1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone setup” → 3. “Pair phone” l Selecting a cellular phone to be used 1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone setup” → 3. “Select phone” 3 Interior and exterior features l Changing a registered name 1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone setup” → 3. “Change name” l Listing the registered cellular phones 1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone setup” → 3. “List phones” l Changing the passkey 1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone setup” → 3. “Set passkey” l Deleting a cellular phone 1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone setup” → 3. “Delete” Registering a cellular phone Select “Pair phone” by using a voice command or , and do the procedure for registering a cellular phone. (→P. 366) 377 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Selecting a cellular phone to be used Select “Select phone” by using a voice command or . Pattern A Select a cellular phone to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press and say the desired phone name. b. Press and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press . Pattern B Select a cellular phone to be used by using . Changing a registered name Select “Change name” by using a voice command or . Select a name of cellular phone to be changed by either of the following methods: a. Press and say the desired phone name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or 378 . 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) b. Press and say “List phones”. While the desired phone name is being read aloud, press . c. Select the desired phone name by using Press . or select “(RECORD NAME)” by using , and say a new name. Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . 3 Select “List phones” by using a voice command or and the system begins reading aloud the list of the registered cellular phones. When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone setup”. Pressing while a name of cellular phone is being read selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be available: • Selecting a cellular phone: “Select phone” • Changing a registered name: “Change name” • Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete” 379 Interior and exterior features Listing the registered cellular phones 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Changing the passkey Select “Set passkey” by using a voice command or . Pattern A Press , say a four to eight-digit number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . Pattern B Select a four to eight-digit number by using . The number should be input one digit at a time. When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press once again. Deleting a cellular phone Select “Delete” by using a voice command or . Pattern A Select a cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press phone. 380 and say the name of the desired cellular 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) b. Press and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press . Pattern B Select a cellular phone to be deleted by using . n The number of cellular phones that can be registered Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system. 3 Interior and exterior features 381 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Security and system setup To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below: n Security setting items and operation procedure l Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number) 1. “Setup” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Set PIN” l Locking the phone book 1. “Setup” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phone book lock” l Unlocking the phone book 1. “Setup” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phone book unlock” n System setup items and operation procedure l Setting voice guidance volume 1. “Setup” → 2. “(SYSTEM SETUP)”→ 3. “(GUIDANCE VOL)” l Initialization 1. “Setup” → 2. “(SYSTEM SETUP)” → 3. “(INITIALIZE)” can only be used for system setup operation. Setting or changing the PIN n Setting a PIN Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or Enter a PIN by using a voice command or When using 382 . . , input the number one digit at a time. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) n Changing the PIN Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or . Enter the registered PIN by using a voice command or . Enter a new PIN by using a voice command or When using . , input the number one digit at a time. 3 Locking or unlocking the phone book . Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or a. Press : and say the registered PIN. b. Input a new PIN by using . 383 Interior and exterior features Select “Phone book lock (PHBK LOCK)” or “Phone book unlock (PHBK UNLOCK)” by using a voice command or 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Setting voice guidance volume Select “(GUIDANCE VOL)” by using . Change the voice guidance volume. To decrease the volume: Turn To increase the volume: Turn counterclockwise. clockwise. Initialization Select “(INITIALIZE)” and then “(CONFIRM)” by using . Select “(CONFIRM)” by using 384 again. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) n When the phone book is locked The following functions cannot be used: l Dialing by inputting a name l Speed dialing l Dialing a phone number stored in the call history memory l Using the phone book n Initialization l The following data in the system can be initialized: 385 3 Interior and exterior features • Phone book • Outgoing and incoming history memory • Speed dial data • Registered cellular phone data • PIN l Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Using the phone book To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below: l Adding a new phone number 1. “Phone book” → 2. “Add entry” l Changing a registered name 1. “Phone book” → 2. “Change name” l Listing the registered data 1. “Phone book” → 2. “List names” l Setting speed dial 1. “Phone book” → 2. “Set speed dial (SPEED DIAL)” l Deleting registered data 1. “Phone book” → 2. “Delete entry” l Deleting speed dial 1. “Phone book” → 2. “Delete speed dial (DEL SPD DIAL)” Adding a new phone number The following methods can be used to add a new phone number: l Inputting a phone number by using a voice command l Transferring data from the cellular phone l Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history memory l Inputting a phone number by using n Adding procedure Select “Add entry” by using a voice command or 386 . 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Use one of the following methods to input a phone number: Inputting a phone number by using voice commands STEP2-1 Select “By voice” by using a voice command or . STEP2-2 Press , say the desired phone number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command. Transferring data from the cellular phone STEP2-1 Select “By phone” and then “Confirm” by using a voice command or 3 . Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the details of transferring data. STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . b. Select the desired data by using . 387 Interior and exterior features STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history memory STEP2-1 Select “Call history” by using a voice command or . STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” by using a voice command or . STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . b. Select the desired data by using . Inputting a phone number by using STEP2-1 Select “(MANUAL INPUT)” by using STEP2-2 Input a phone number by using once again. Input the phone number one digit at a time. 388 . , and press 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press and say the desired name. b. Select “(RECORD NAME)” by using , and say the desired name. Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or 3 again. Setting speed dial Select “Set speed dial (SPEED DIAL)” by using a voice command or . Select the data to be registered as speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press , say the desired phone number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . 389 Interior and exterior features In , selecting “Set speed dial (SPEED DIAL)” instead of “Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as speed dial. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) b. Press , and say “List names”. While the desired name is being read aloud, press using a voice command or , and select “Confirm” by . c. Select the desired data by using . Select the desired preset button, and register the data into speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . b. Press and hold the desired preset button. Changing a registered name Select “Change name” by using a voice command or . Select a name to be changed by either of the following methods. a. Press , say the desired name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or b. Press , and say “List names”. While the desired name is read aloud, press 390 . . 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) c. Select the desired name by using . Select “(RECORD NAME)” by using . Say a new name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . Deleting registered data Select “Delete entry” by using a voice command or . 3 Pattern A and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or a. Press : , and say the name of the desired phone num- ber to be deleted. b. Press , say “List phones”. While the name of the desired phone number is being read aloud, press . Pattern B Select data to be deleted by using “(CONFIRM)” by using , and select . 391 Interior and exterior features Select data to be deleted by either of the following methods, 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Deleting speed dial Select “Delete speed dial (DEL SPD DIAL)” by using a voice command or . Press the preset button for which the desired speed dial is registered, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . Listing the registered data Select “List names” by using a voice command and the system begins reading aloud the list of the registered data. When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone book”. Pressing while an entry is being read aloud selects the entry, and the following functions will be available. • • • • Dialing: “Dial” Changing a registered name: “Change name” Deleting an entry: “Delete entry” Setting speed dial: “Set speed dial (SPEED DIAL)” n Limitation of number of digits A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered. 392 3-5. Using the interior lights Interior lights list Your Toyota is equipped with an illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Due to the function of the system, the lights shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off according to whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are opened/closed, and the engine switch position. 3 Interior and exterior features Outer foot lights (if equipped) Personal/interior lights (→P. 395) Engine switch light (if equipped) Foot well lighting (if equipped) Ashtray lighting (if equipped) Cargo lamp (→P. 397) 393 3-5. Using the interior lights Personal/interior light main switch n To prevent the battery from being discharged Personal/interior light If the interior/personal lights remain on when a door is not fully closed and the personal/interior light main switch is in the DOOR position, the lights will turn off automatically after 20 minutes. Cargo lamp If the cargo lamp remains on when a door is not fully closed and the cargo lamp main switch is in the DOOR position, the lights will turn off automatically after 20 minutes. n Customization l That can be configured at Toyota dealer (vehicles without multi-information display) l Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 633) l It is possible to change the settings (vehicles with multi-information display) (Feature customization →P. 200) Personal/interior light main switch ON The personal/interior lights cannot be individually turned off. DOOR position The personal/interior lights come on when a door is opened. They turn off when the doors are closed. OFF The personal/interior lights can be individually turned on or off. 394 3-5. Using the interior lights Personal/interior lights Personal/interior lights Front (type A) On/off Front (type B) 3 On/off Interior and exterior features Front (type C) On/off 395 3-5. Using the interior lights Personal/interior lights Rear (type A) On/off Rear (type B) On/off Rear (type C) On/off 396 3-5. Using the interior lights Personal/interior lights and cargo lamp main switch Rear (type D) On/off Cargo lamp main switch 3 ON Door position The cargo lamp comes on when a door is opened. They turn off when the doors are closed. OFF The cargo lamp can be individually turned on or off. 397 Interior and exterior features The cargo lamp can not be individually turned off. 3-6. Using the storage features List of storage features Front separated type seats Bottle holders Auxiliary boxes (if equipped) Card holder (if equipped) Overhead console (if equipped) Glove boxes Front cup holders Map holder Console box • • • • Card holder Map holder Pen holder Tissue pocket Rear cup holders (if equipped) Storage box (if equipped) 398 3-6. Using the storage features Front bench type seat 3 Interior and exterior features Bottle holders Auxiliary boxes Card holder (if equipped) Overhead console Glove boxes Front cup holders Pen holder Auxiliary box • Card holder • Map holder • Tissue pocket Rear cup holders (if equipped) Storage box (if equipped) 399 3-6. Using the storage features Glove boxes Glove boxes Upper glove box Press the button. Lower glove box Unlock with the master key Lock with the master key Pull the lever up. 400 3-6. Using the storage features Glove boxes and console box CAUTION n Items that should not be left in the upper glove box Do not leave glasses or lighters in the box. If the interior of the vehicle become hot, lighters may explode and glasses may warp or becomes cracked. n Caution while driving Keep the glove box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. Console box (front separated type seats only) 3 Pull the knob up and lift the lid. Interior and exterior features 401 3-6. Using the storage features Console box n When using the console box lid as an armrest Pull the knob up and slide the lid forward. If necessary, the console box lid can slide forward. Pull the lid forward by grasping the front of the lid. When the lid is forward, it cannot be lifted. n Tray in the console box The tray slides forward or backward. The tray can be removed. 402 3-6. Using the storage features Console box and card holder The box can be removed. Hanging file folders can be hung on the rails when the box is removed. 3 Interior and exterior features CAUTION n Caution while driving Keep the console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. Card holder Overhead console (type A) Press the lid. 403 3-6. Using the storage features Card holder Overhead console (type B) Press the lid. Console box (front separated type seats) Pull the knob up and lift the lid. 404 3-6. Using the storage features Card holder Back of the front center seatback (front bench type seat) Pull the lever up and fold down the seatback. Push the knob and lift the lid. 3 Interior and exterior features CAUTION n Caution while driving Keep the auxiliary box, console box or holder closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 405 3-6. Using the storage features Map holder Map holder Center console (front separated type seats) Push the tab down to release the lock and remove the lid. Stow the lid. 406 3-6. Using the storage features Map holder Console box (front separated type seats) Pull the lever up and lift the lid. 3 Pull the lever up and fold down the seatback. 407 Interior and exterior features Back of the front center seatback (front bench type seat) 3-6. Using the storage features Map holder Push the knob and lift the lid. CAUTION n Caution while driving Keep the auxiliary or console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 408 3-6. Using the storage features Pen holder Pen holder Front separated type seats Pull the knob up and lift the lid. 3 Interior and exterior features 409 3-6. Using the storage features Pen holder Front bench type seat Pull the lever up and fold down the seatback. CAUTION n Caution while driving (front separated type seats only) Keep the console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 410 3-6. Using the storage features Tissue pocket Tissue pocket Front separated type seats Pull the knob up and lift the lid. 3 Pull the lever up and fold down the seatback. 411 Interior and exterior features Front bench type seat 3-6. Using the storage features Tissue pocket Push the knob and lift the lid. CAUTION n Caution while driving Keep the auxiliary or console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 412 3-6. Using the storage features Overhead console Overhead console The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items. Type A Push the knob forward to open the console. 3 Push the knob forward to open the console. CAUTION n Items that should not be left in the overhead console Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console. If the interior of the vehicle become hot, lighters may explode and glasses may warp or becomes cracked. n Caution while driving Do not leave the overhead console open while driving. Items stored in it may fall out and cause injury. 413 Interior and exterior features Type B 3-6. Using the storage features Front cup holders Front cup holders Separated type seats Bench type seat Pull the lever up and fold down the seatback. 414 3-6. Using the storage features Front cup holders n Removing the cup holder (separated type seats only) Push the tab down to release the lock and remove the lid. Stow the lid. 3 Interior and exterior features Pull the cup holder up and remove it. CAUTION n Items unsuitable for the cup holder Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns. 415 3-6. Using the storage features Rear cup holders Rear cup holders Double Cab models with front separated type seats Pull the lid down. Double Cab models with front bench type seat Pull the lid down. CrewMax models Pull the armrest down. 416 3-6. Using the storage features Rear cup holders and bottle holders CAUTION n Items unsuitable for the cup holder Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns. Bottle holders Instrument panel (front bench type seat) Push the lid. 3 Interior and exterior features Front door 417 3-6. Using the storage features Bottle holders Rear door (type A) Rear door (type B) n Removing the hold separator (front bench type seat only) Remove the hold separator. CAUTION n When not in use (front bench type seat only) Keep the bottle holders closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 418 3-6. Using the storage features Bottle holders and auxiliary boxes NOTICE n Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders. Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break. Auxiliary boxes Front door Press the knob and open the lid. 3 Interior and exterior features Front bench type seat (type A) Pull the strap. 419 3-6. Using the storage features Auxiliary boxes Front bench type seat (type B) Pull the lever up and fold down the seatback. Push the knob and lift the lid. Front bench type seat (type C) Pull the lever up and fold down the seatback. 420 3-6. Using the storage features Auxiliary boxes and storage box Push the knob and lift the lid. 3 Interior and exterior features CAUTION n Caution while driving Keep the auxiliary boxes closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. Storage box (if equipped) n Using the storage box Pull the lever up and raise the rear seat cushion. 421 3-6. Using the storage features Storage box Turn the knob in the OPEN direction. Lift the lid. n Remove the storage box Pull the lever up and raise the rear seat cushion. Turn the knob in the OPEN direction. Lift the lid. Remove the lids. Turn the knobs clockwise. Remove the storage box. 422 3-6. Using the storage features CAUTION n Caution while driving Keep the storage box lids closed. Injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking. n To prevent damage to the storage box Do not put heavy loads on the lids. 3 Interior and exterior features 423 3-7. Other interior features Sun visors n Main visor Forward position: Flip down. Side position: Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side. Side extender: Place in side position then slide backwards. n Sub visor (if equipped) Flip down. 424 3-7. Other interior features Vanity mirrors Vehicles without vanity light Open the cover. Vehicles with vanity light Open the cover. 3 Adjust the brightness of the light. 425 Interior and exterior features The light turns on when the cover is opened. 3-7. Other interior features Clock Adjusts the hours. Adjusts the minutes. n For quicker adjustment of the clock (if equipped) Hold down the M or H button continuously. This allows faster advancement of the minutes and hours. n The clock is displayed when The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position. n When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals The time display will automatically be set to 1:00. 426 3-7. Other interior features Outside temperature display (if equipped) Displays the outside air temperature. The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C). Switches the outside air temperature display between °C (Celsius) and °F (Fahrenheit). (if equipped) Vehicles without multi-information display: Vehicles with multi-information display: With the customized unitchange operation for the multiinformation display, the unit of measurement can be changed. (→P. 206) 427 Interior and exterior features Push the SETUP US/M button until the desired unit of measurement is displayed. 3 3-7. Other interior features n When – –°C or – –°F is displayed The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer. n The outside air temperature is displayed when The engine switch is in the ON position. n When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals The display will automatically be set to the initial mode. n Display In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change. l When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h]) l When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/ exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.) 428 3-7. Other interior features Ashtray Front separated type seats The ashtray can be installed in a cup holder. Front bench type seat Pull the ashtray out. 3 Interior and exterior features 429 3-7. Other interior features n The ashtray can be removed Front separated type seats Pull the ashtray out. Front bench type seat Push down on the lock spring plate and pull out. CAUTION n When not in use Keep the ashtray closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. n To prevent fire l Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, and then make sure the ashtray is fully closed. l Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray. 430 3-7. Other interior features Cigarette lighter Front separated type seats Push the cigarette lighter in. The cigarette lighter will pop out when it is ready for use. Front bench type seat Push the cigarette lighter in. 3 n The cigarette lighter can be used when The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position. CAUTION n To avoid burns or fires l Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter. l Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire. l Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet. 431 Interior and exterior features The cigarette lighter will pop out when it is ready for use. 3-7. Other interior features Power outlets (12V DC) The power outlet can be used for accessories that run on less than 10 A. Type A (Instrument panel) 432 3-7. Other interior features Type B (Instrument panel) 3 Interior and exterior features Type C (Under the seat cushion of the front center seat) 433 3-7. Other interior features Type D (Back of the front center seatback) Type E (Inside of the console box) 434 3-7. Other interior features Type F (Back of the console box) Type G (Back of the front center seatback) 3 Interior and exterior features Type H (Back of the console box) 435 3-7. Other interior features n The power outlet can be used when The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position. n Depending on operating time and current consumption The power outlets may not be used due to the electrical component protection function. Please start engine and use the power outlets again after turn off the engine switch in this case. NOTICE n To avoid damaging the power outlet Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit. n To prevent the fuse from being blown Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V/10 A. n To prevent the battery from being discharged Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is stopped. 436 3-7. Other interior features Power outlets (if 115V AC equipped) The power outlet can be used for accessories that use less than 100W. Front separated type seats Main switch To use the power outlet, turn on the main switch. The indicator comes on. Power outlet socket 3 Interior and exterior features 437 3-7. Other interior features Front bench type seat Main switch To use the power outlet, turn on the main switch. The indicator comes on. Power outlet socket n The power outlet can be used when The engine switch is in the ON position. CAUTION n Using a power outlet Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury. l Use of the power outlet when it is wet with drinking water or snow may result in electrical shocks and is extremely dangerous. The power outlet must be thoroughly dried before use. l Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet. l Be careful not to get any part of your body caught in the power outlet lid. l When using electrical appliances, strictly follow any cautions and notices written on their labels and in the manufacturers’ instruction manuals. 438 3-7. Other interior features CAUTION n Using a power outlet l Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet or its inverter, in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunctions or accidents, which could cause serious damage or injuries. Contact a Toyota dealer for any necessary repairs. n To prevent injuries and accidents, securely fix all electric appliances before use and do not use any appliances that may do any of the following. l Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving. l Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating while driving. 3 l Emit steam, while the windows of the cabin are closed. l Using the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping. l Contaminating the power outlet with liquid substances or mud. l Handling electrical appliance plugs at the power outlet with wet hands or feet. l Inserting foreign objects into the power outlet. l Using malfunctioning electric appliances. l Inserting inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet. 439 Interior and exterior features n To prevent unexpected accidents, such as electric shocks, do not perform any of the following. 3-7. Other interior features NOTICE n To avoid damaging the power outlet and the plug l Close the power outlet lid when not in use. l Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit. l Do not use plug adaptors to connect too many plugs to the power outlet. l After inserting a plug, gently close the power outlet lid. n To prevent the fuse from being blown Do not use a 115V AC appliance that requires more than 100 W. If a 115V AC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply. n Appliances that may not operate properly The following 115V AC appliances may not operate even if their power consumption is under 100 W. l Appliances with high initial peak wattage l Measuring devices that process precise data l Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply n To prevent the battery from being discharged Turn off all the vehicle’s electronic equipment and accessories, such as the headlights and air conditioning, when electrical appliances that consume in excess of 100W are used continuously for long periods of time. n To prevent any damage caused by heat l Do not use any electrical appliances that give off intense heat such as toasters, in any locations including the internal or external trim, seats and deck. l Do not use any electrical appliances, which are easily affected by vibration or heat, inside the vehicle. Vibration while driving, or the heat of the sun while parking, may result in damage to those electrical appliances. n If any electrical appliances are to be used while driving Securely fasten both the appliances and their cables to prevent them from falling or getting caught any of the power train components. 440 3-7. Other interior features NOTICE n If the power outlet is loose when an electrical appliance plug is connected Replace the outlet. Contact a Toyota dealer for any necessary replacements. n If the power outlet gets dirty Turn the main switch off and use a soft, clean cloth to wipe it gently. Do not use any cleansing materials, such as organic solvents, wax, or compound cleaners, as these may damage the power outlet or cause it to malfunction. 3 Interior and exterior features 441 3-7. Other interior features Seat heaters (if equipped) On The indicator comes on. Adjusts the seat temperature. The further you turn the dial upward, the warmer the seat becomes. n The seat heaters can be used when The engine switch is in the ON position. n When not in use Turn the dial fully downward. The indicator turns off. 442 3-7. Other interior features CAUTION n Burns l Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns: • • • • Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled Persons with sensitive skin Persons who are fatigued Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) l Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater. Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating. n To prevent seat heater damage Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. n To prevent battery discharge Turn the switches off when the engine is not running. 443 Interior and exterior features NOTICE 3 3-7. Other interior features Armrest (CrewMax models only) Pull the armrest down for use. NOTICE n To prevent damage to the armrest l Do not place too much strain on the armrest. l Do not sit on the armrest. 444 3-7. Other interior features Seatback table (if equipped) Front passenger’s seatback can be used as a temporary table only when the vehicle is stopped. Fold down the front passenger’s seat to use the seatback table. (→P. 61) 3 CAUTION Interior and exterior features n Caution while driving Observe the following precautions to avoid death or serious injury. l Do not set up the seatback table. l Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback table. NOTICE n To prevent damage to the seatback table Do not put heavy loads on the table. 445 3-7. Other interior features Floor mat Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet. Secure the driver’s floor mat using the hooks provided. CAUTION n When inserting the floor mat Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident. l Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct side faces upward. l Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats. 446 3-7. Other interior features Luggage compartment features n Deck hooks Deck hooks are provided for securing loose items. 3 Interior and exterior features 447 3-7. Other interior features n Cargo net hooks (CrewMax models only) To hang the cargo net, use the cargo net hooks. The cargo net itself is not included as original equipment. n Shopping bag hooks (CrewMax models only) To hang shopping bags, use the shopping bag hooks. 448 3-7. Other interior features NOTICE n To prevent damage to the cargo net hooks and shopping bag hooks l Avoid hanging heavy loads on the cargo net hooks or shopping bag hooks. l Avoid hanging things other than the cargo net when using the shopping bag hooks as cargo net hooks. 3 Interior and exterior features 449 3-7. Other interior features Garage door opener (if equipped) The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices. The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink®. Programming the HomeLink® (for U.S.A. owners) The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device. Indicator Buttons 450 3-7. Other interior features n Programming the HomeLink® Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink® control buttons. Keep the indicator on the HomeLink® in view while programming. Test the operation of HomeLink® by pressing newly programmed button. the the If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the Rolling Code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator (on the HomeLink®) flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the Rolling Code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”. 451 3 Interior and exterior features Press and hold down one of the buttons on the HomeLink® and the button on the transmitter. When the indicator on the HomeLink® changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons. 3-7. Other interior features Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink® buttons. n Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners) If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink®” before proceeding with the steps listed below. Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button. Press the training button. Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink® button twice. The garage door may open. If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door. The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink® transceiver and operate the garage door. Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons. n Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink®. Keep the indicator on the HomeLink® in view while programming. Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button. Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete. 452 3-7. Other interior features When the indicator on the HomeLink® compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons. Test the operation of the HomeLink® by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly. Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink® buttons. n Programming other devices To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Toyota dealer for assistance. 3 n Reprogramming a button Operating the HomeLink® Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator on the HomeLink® transceiver should turn on. The HomeLink® continues to send a signal for a maximum of 20 seconds if the button is held in. Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs) Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink® memory. 453 Interior and exterior features The individual HomeLink® buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the programming instructions. 3-7. Other interior features n Before programming l Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter. l The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink®. n Certification for the garage door opener This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. CAUTION n When programming a garage door or other remote control device The garage door may operate, so ensure that people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm. n Conforming to federal safety standards Do not use the HomeLink® Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury. 454 3-7. Other interior features Compass (if equipped) The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading. n Operation To turn the compass on or off, press the switch. 3 n Displays and directions Direction N North NE Northeast E East SE Southeast S South SW Southwest W West NW Northwest Interior and exterior features Display 455 3-7. Other interior features Calibrating the compass Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8 The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle. If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate. To obtain higher precision or accurate calibration, refer to the following. n Deviation calibration Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle. Press the switch until a number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display. Press the switch, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are. If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete. 456 3-7. Other interior features n Circling calibration When “CAL” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed. n Conditions unfavorable to correct operation The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions: 3 l The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning. l The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.). l The vehicle has become magnetized. (There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.) l The battery has been disconnected. l A door is open. CAUTION n While driving the vehicle Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. n When doing the circling calibration Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration. 457 Interior and exterior features l The vehicle is on an inclined surface. 3-7. Other interior features NOTICE n To avoid the compass malfunctions Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor. n To ensure normal operation of the compass l Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields. l During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration. 458 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition. l Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust. Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois. l For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water. l Wipe away any water. l Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates. If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool. n Automatic car washes l Before washing the vehicle, do the following. • Fold the mirrors back. • Remove the antenna. l Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint. n High pressure car washes Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. Before entering an automatic car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly. n Aluminum wheels (if equipped) Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint. n Bumpers and side moldings Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. 460 4-1. Maintenance and care n To prevent deterioration and body corrosion l Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: • • • • • After driving near the sea coast After driving on salted roads If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface If you see dead insects or bird droppings on the paint After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances • If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud • If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface l If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. CAUTION n Caution about the exhaust pipe Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns. n To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline. n Cleaning the exterior lights l Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. l Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. 461 Maintenance and care NOTICE 4 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it in top condition: n Protecting the vehicle interior Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water. n Cleaning the leather areas l Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. l Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent. Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent. l Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent. l Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area. n Synthetic leather areas l Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner. l Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth. l Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth. 462 4-1. Maintenance and care n Cleaning the inside of the back window (vehicles with the back window defogger) Do not use glass cleaner to clean the back window, as this may cause damage to the back window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires. n Caring for leather areas Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior. n Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible. n Seat belts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. n Water in the vehicle l Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire. l Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P. 116) Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury. 463 Maintenance and care CAUTION 4 4-1. Maintenance and care NOTICE n Cleaning detergents Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces. n Preventing damage to leather surfaces Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces. l Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately. l Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer. l Do not place items made of vinyl or plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly. n Water on the floor Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust. n Cleaning the inside of the back window (vehicles with the back window defogger) Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires. 464 4-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance. n General maintenance Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer. n Scheduled maintenance Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule. For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. n Do-it-yourself maintenance You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage. For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. n Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage. Flex-fuel vehicles: Flex-fuel vehicles use special parts made exclusively for flex-fuel vehicles. When servicing or repairing your vehicles, use genuine Toyota parts made exclusively for your flex-fuel vehicle. 465 Maintenance and care The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended. 4 4-2. Maintenance n Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer l Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle. l Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it. CAUTION n Warning in handling of battery l Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area. l Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately. l Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (→P. 489) 466 4-2. Maintenance General maintenance Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice. Engine compartment Items Check points Battery Maintenance-free. (→P. 489) Brake fluid At the correct level? (→P. 486) Engine coolant At the correct level? (→P. 484) Engine oil At the correct level? (→P. 479) Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds? Power steering fluid At the correct level? Radiator/condenser/hoses Not blocked with foreign matter? (→P. 486) Washer fluid At the correct level? 4 (→P. 488) Maintenance and care (→P. 492) 467 4-2. Maintenance Vehicle interior Items 468 Check points Accelerator pedal • Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)? Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism • Can the vehicle be held securely on an incline with the shift lever in P? Brake pedal • Moves smoothly? • Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play? Brakes • Not pull to one side when applied? • Loss of brake effectiveness? • Spongy feeling brake pedal? • Pedal almost touches floor? Head restraints • Move smoothly and lock securely? Indicators/buzzers • Function properly? Lights • Do all the lights come on? • Headlights aimed correctly? Parking brake • Moves smoothly? • Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline? Seat belts • Does the seat belt system operate smoothly? • Are the belts undamaged? Seats • Do the seat controls operate properly? Steering wheel • Moves smoothly? • Has correct free play? • No strange noises? 4-2. Maintenance Vehicle exterior Items Check points Doors • Operate smoothly? Engine hood • The lock system works properly? Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after parking? Tire • Inflation pressure is correct? • Tire surfaces not worn or damaged? • Tires rotated according to the maintenance schedule? • Wheel nuts are not loose? CAUTION 4 n If the engine is running 469 Maintenance and care Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks. 4-2. Maintenance Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. n If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/ M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle. n Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test: l When the battery is disconnected or discharged Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. l When the fuel tank cap is loose The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test. n When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times. n If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing. 470 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedures as given in these sections. Items Parts and tools (→P. 489) Brake fluid level (→P. 486) • FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid • Rag or paper towel (→P. 484) • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. Engine oil level (→P. 479) • Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding oil) Fuses (→P. 512) • Fuse with same amperage rating as original Engine coolant level 4 Maintenance and care Battery condition • Warm water • Baking soda • Grease • Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) 471 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Items Light bulbs Parts and tools (→P. 522) Power steering fluid level (→P. 488) Radiator and condenser (→P. 486) 472 • Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original • Phillips-head screwdriver • Flathead screwdriver • Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III • Rag or paper towel ⎯ Tire inflation pressure (→P. 501) • Tire pressure gauge • Compressed air source Washer fluid • Water • Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use) (→P. 492) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury observe the following precautions. n When working on the engine compartment l Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. l Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. l Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment. l Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable. l Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor. n When working near the cooling fan or radiator grille Be sure the engine switch is off. With the engine switch on, the cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. n Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes. 473 4 Maintenance and care l Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE n If you remove the air cleaner Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment. n If the brake fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the brake fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem. 474 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Hood Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood. Pull the hood release lever. The hood will pop up slightly. Pull up the hood catch lever and lift the hood. 4 n Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury. 475 Maintenance and care CAUTION 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine compartment 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine Washer fluid tank (→P. 492) Engine oil level dipstick (→P. 479) 476 Brake fluid reservoir (→P. 486) Fuse box (→P. 512) Engine coolant reservoir (→P. 484) Battery (→P. 489) Radiator (→P. 486) Engine oil filler cap (→P. 480) Condenser (→P. 486) Power steering fluid reservoir (→P. 488) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine 4 Engine oil level dipstick (→P. 479) Brake fluid reservoir (→P. 486) Fuse box (→P. 512) Engine coolant reservoir (→P. 484) Battery (→P. 489) Radiator (→P. 486) Engine oil filler cap (→P. 480) Condenser (→P. 486) Power steering fluid reservoir (→P. 488) 477 Maintenance and care Washer fluid tank (→P. 492) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine Washer fluid tank (→P. 492) Engine oil level dipstick (→P. 479) 478 Brake fluid reservoir (→P. 486) Fuse box (→P. 512) Engine coolant reservoir (→P. 484) Battery (→P. 489) Radiator (→P. 486) Engine oil filler cap (→P. 481) Condenser (→P. 486) Power steering fluid reservoir (→P. 488) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine oil With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. n Checking the engine oil Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine. Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out. 4 Wipe the dipstick clean. Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully. 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) and 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engines Low Full 479 Maintenance and care Reinsert the dipstick fully. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine Low Full n Adding engine oil 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine. 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine. 480 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine. Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil. Oil grade ILSAC multigrade engine oil Items Clean funnel Remove the oil filler cap, turning it counterclockwise. 4 Add engine oil slowly. Reinstall the filler cap, turning it clockwise. The approximate quantity of oil needed to raise the level between low and full on the dipstick is indicated as follows: 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) and 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engines 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.) 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine 1.2 qt. (1.1 L, 1.0 lmp. qt.) 481 Maintenance and care Checking the dipstick. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Recommended viscosity 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) and 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engines SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather. *: Outside temperature If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available, SAE 10W-30 oil may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change. 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 *: SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil may be used. However, SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather. Outside temperature n How to read oil container labels Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that help you to select the proper oil. 482 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Engine oil consumption l The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven. l More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration. l A new engine consumes more oil. l When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately. n After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only) The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures: Turn the engine switch off with the trip meter A reading shown. While pressing the trip meter reset button (→P. 188, 190), turn the engine switch on. Without multi-information display 4 Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays 000000. Continue to press and hold the button until “MAINT REQD RESET MODE COMPLETE” appears on the multi-information display. CAUTION n Used engine oil l Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. l Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal. l Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children. 483 Maintenance and care With multi-information display 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE n To prevent serious engine damage Check the oil level on a regular basis. n When replacing the engine oil l Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. l Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged. l Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. l Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened. Engine coolant The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the FULL and LOW lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold. Reservoir cap FULL LOW If the level is on or below the LOW line, add coolant up to the FULL line. n If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system. 484 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Coolant selection Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31°F [-35°C]) Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44°F [-42°C]) For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer. CAUTION n When the engine is hot Do not remove the radiator cap. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries. 4 n When adding engine coolant Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label. n If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint. 485 Maintenance and care NOTICE 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Radiator and condenser Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects. If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer. CAUTION n When the engine is hot Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and may cause burns. Brake fluid n Checking fluid level The brake fluid level should be between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. n Adding fluid Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items. Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid Items Rag or paper towel n Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid. 486 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance . CAUTION n When filling the reservoir Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor. NOTICE n If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem. n If you spill fluid 4 Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint. Maintenance and care 487 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Power steering fluid n Fluid level The fluid level should be within the appropriate range. Full (when cold) Add fluid (when cold) Full (when hot) Add fluid (when hot) Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C]) Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room temperature, 50°F - 85°F [10°C - 30°C]) n Checking the fluid level Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items. Fluid type Items Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III Rag or paper towel Clean all dirt off the reservoir. Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise. Wipe the dipstick clean. Reinstall and remove the reservoir cap again. Check the fluid level. CAUTION n Checking the fluid level Take care, as the reservoir may be hot. 488 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE n When adding fluid Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged. n After replacing the reservoir cap Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage. Battery n Battery exterior Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps. Terminals Hold-down clamp 4 Maintenance and care n Checking battery condition Check the battery condition using the indicator color. Type A Blue: Good condition White: Charging is necessary. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. Red: Not working properly, have the battery checked by your Toyota dealer. 489 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Type B Green: Good condition Dark: Charging is necessary. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. Clear or light yellow: Not working properly, have the battery checked by your Toyota dealer. n Before recharging When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging: l If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. l Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery. CAUTION n Chemicals in the battery A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery: l Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools. l Do not smoke or light a match near the battery. l Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. l Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. l Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery. l Keep children away from the battery. 490 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION n Where to safely charge the battery Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation. n How to recharge the battery Only perform a slow charge (5A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate. n Emergency measures regarding electrolyte l If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. l If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. l If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately. NOTICE n When recharging the battery Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. 491 4 Maintenance and care l If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Washer fluid Add washer fluid in the following situations. l Any washer does not work. l The low washer fluid warning light comes on. (if equipped) l The warning message appears on the multi-information display. (if equipped) Open the lid. Add washer fluid. CAUTION n When refilling the washer fluid Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc. 492 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE n Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces. n Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank. 4 Maintenance and care 493 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tires Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear. n Checking tires New tread Treadwear indicator Worn tread The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or “ ” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire. Check spare tire condition and inflation pressure if not rotated. n Tire rotation Rotate the tires in the order shown. Front To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection. Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation. n The tire pressure warning system Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (→P. 548) 494 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (→P. 496) Initializing the tire pressure warning system n The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances: l When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures. l When changing the tire size. 4 n How to initialize the tire pressure warning system Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the engine switch off. While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (→P. 615) Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level. Turn the engine switch to the ON position. 495 Maintenance and care When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch about 3 seconds. After releasing the switch, check that the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly three times. Wait for several minutes with the engine switch on, and then turn the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position. Registering ID codes The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your Toyota dealer. n When to replace your vehicle’s tires Tires should be replaced if: l You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage l A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer. 496 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Replacing tires and wheels If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction. n Tire life Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious. n If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires The effectiveness of snow tires is lost. n Maximum load of tire Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. (→P. 501, 622). 1 Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. 2 All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. 497 Maintenance and care n Tire types 4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 3 Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 246) n Initializing the tire pressure warning system Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level. n If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again. n When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed Initialization can be completed in several minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. l When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pres- sure warning light does not flash 3 times. l After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warn- ing light blinks for 1 minute and then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes. n Routine tire inflation pressure checks The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks. 498 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Tire pressure warning system certification MODEL/FCC IDs: Transmitter: GQ4-32T Receiver: GQ4-37R IC (Canada) IDs: Transmitter: 1470A-13T Receiver: 1470A-9R For vehicles sold in U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 4 For vehicles sold in Canada CAUTION n When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or injury accidents. l Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or tread- wear. l Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota. l Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires. l Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires. 499 Maintenance and care Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION n When inspecting or replacing tires l Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. l Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously. n When initializing the tire pressure warning system Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal. NOTICE n Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. n To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires. n Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body. n If tire inflation pressures become low while driving Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined. 500 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tire inflation pressure n Tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 622) 4 Maintenance and care 501 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Inspection and adjustment procedure Tire valve Tire pressure gauge Remove the tire valve cap. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge. If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust inflate the tire. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. Reinstall the tire valve cap. n Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare. n Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: l Reduced fuel efficiency l Reduced driving comfort and tire life l Reduced safety l Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer. 502 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: l Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading. l Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling. l Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving. l Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced. CAUTION 4 n Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance l Excessive wear l Uneven wear l Poor handling l Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires l Poor sealing of the tire bead l Wheel deformation and/or tire separation l A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards 503 Maintenance and care Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE n When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible. 504 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Wheels If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control. n Wheel selection When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset. Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer. Toyota does not recommend using: l Wheels of different sizes or types l Used wheels l Bent wheels that have been straightened 4 n Wheel precautions l When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 100 miles (160 km). l Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains. l Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels. n When replacing wheels The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (except for spare tire) that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P. 495) 505 Maintenance and care l Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrench designed for use with your aluminum wheels. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION n When replacing wheels l Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control. l Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury. NOTICE n Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters l Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn- ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Toyota dealer. l Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels. 506 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Air conditioning filter The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency. n Removal method Turn the engine switch off. Open the glove box. Slide off the damper. 4 507 Maintenance and care Push in each side of the glove box to disconnect the claws. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Remove the filter cover. Pull the filter out of the filter outlet. n Cleaning method If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the filter from the downward side. Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from the filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes at 72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or bar). If it is not available, have the filter cleaned by your Toyota dealer. 508 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Replacement method Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one. The “↑UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up. n Checking interval Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) Maintenance and care n If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically 4 The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary. NOTICE n To prevent damage to the system l When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed. l When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water. 509 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Wireless remote control battery Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged. n You will need the following items: Lithium battery CR2032 n Replacing the battery Remove the cover using a coin protected with tape etc. Remove the discharged transmitter battery. Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up. 510 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n If the wireless remote control battery is discharged The following symptoms may occur. l The wireless remote control will not function properly. l The operational range is reduced. n Use a CR2032 lithium battery l Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera stores. l Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your Toyota dealer. l Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. CAUTION n Removed battery and other parts Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking. 4 Maintenance and care NOTICE n For normal operation after replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. l Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. l Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control. l Do not bend either of the battery terminals. 511 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Checking and replacing fuses If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary. Turn the engine switch off. The fuses are located in the following places. To check the fuses, follow the instructions below. Engine compartment Push the tab in and lift the lid off. Under the instrument panel Remove the lid. After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” (→P. 515) for details about which fuse to check. 512 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Remove the fuse with the pullout tool. 4 Maintenance and care 513 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Check if the fuse has blown. Type A Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. Type B Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. Type C Normal fuse Blown fuse Contact your Toyota dealer. 514 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse layout and amperage ratings n Engine compartment Fuse Ampere Circuit A/F 15 A 2 HORN 10 A Horn 3 EFI NO.1 25 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 4 IG2 MAIN 30 A INJ, MET, IGN fuses 5 DEICER 20 A Front windshield wiper de-icer 6 TOW TAIL 30 A Trailer lights (tail lights) 7 POWER NO.2 30 A Power back windows 8 FOG 15 A Front fog lights 4 Maintenance and care 1 Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 515 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 9 STOP 15 A Stop lights, high mounted stoplight, vehicle stability control system, anti-lock brake system, shift lock system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, towing converter 10 TOW BRK 30 A Trailer brake controller 11 IMB 7.5 A Engine immobilizer system 12 AM2 7.5 A Starting system 13 TOWING 30 A Towing converter 14 ALT-S 5A Charging system 15 TURN-HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights, emergency flashers, towing converter 16 F/PMP 15 A No circuit 17 ETCS 10 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, electric throttle control system 18 MET-B 5A Gauges and meters 19 AMP 30 A Audio system, rear view monitor, navigation system, rear seat entertainment system 20 RAD NO.1 15 A Audio system, rear view monitor, navigation system, rear seat entertainment system 7.5 A Multiplex communication system, Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror, power outlets, power front driver’s seat, power tilt and power telescopic 21 516 ECU-B1 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 22 DOME 7.5 A Interior lights, personal lights, vanity lights, engine switch light, foot light, door courtesy lights, accessory meter 23 HEAD LH 15 A Left-hand headlight (high beam) 24 HEAD LL 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam) 25 INJ 10 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, ignition system 26 MET 7.5 A Gauges and meters IGN 10 A 28 HEAD RH 15 A Right-hand headlight (high beam) 29 HEAD RL 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam) 30 EFI NO.2 10 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, leak detection pump 31 DEF I/UP 5A No circuit 32 SPARE 5A Spare fuse 33 SPARE 15 A Spare fuse 34 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse 35 DEFOG 40 A Back window defogger 36 SUB BATT 40 A Trailer towing 37 ABS1 50 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system 4 Maintenance and care 27 SRS airbag system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, engine immobilizer system, cruise control system 517 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 38 ABS2 40 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system 39 ST 30 A Starting system 40 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system 150 A AM1, TAIL, PANEL, ACC, CIG, LHIG, 4WD, ECU-IG No.1, BK/UP LP, SEAT-HTR, A/C IG, ECU-IG No.2, WSH, WIPER, OBD, A/C, TI&TE, FR P/SEAT RH, MIR, DR/LCK, FR P/SEAT LH, CARGO LP, PWR OUTLET, POWER No.1 fuses 41 LH-J/B 180 A* LH-J/B, HTR, SUB BATT, TOW BRK, STOP, FOG, TOW TAIL, DEICER fuses 42 ALT 43 A/PUMP NO.1 50 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 44 A/PUMP NO.2 50 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 45 MAIN 40 A HEAD LL, HEAD RL, HEAD LH, HEAD RH fuses *: 518 140 A* Replace the fuse with one of the same ampere rating as the original. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Under the instrument panel Ampere 1 INVERTER 15 A Power outlet (115 V) 2 FR P/SEAT LH 30 A Power front driver’s seat 3 DR/LCK 25 A Multiplex communication system 4 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system 5 PWR OUTLET 15 A Power outlets 6 CARGO LP 7.5 A Cargo lamp 7 AM1 7.5 A Shift lock system, starting system 8 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system 9 MIR 15 A Outside rear view mirror control, outside rear view mirror heaters 10 FR P/SEAT RH 30 A Power front passenger seat 11 TI&TE 15 A Power tilt and power telescopic 12 S/ROOF 25 A Electric moon roof 7.5 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, multiplex communication system, intuitive parking assist system, power front driver’s seat, power tilt and power telescopic, shift lock, tire pressure warning system, accessory meter, trailer towing, power outlet, electric moon roof 13 ECU-IG No.1 Circuit 4 Maintenance and care Fuse 519 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 14 LH-IG 7.5 A Back-up lights, charging system, gauge and meters, turn signal lights, air conditioning system, seat heaters, back window defogger 15 4WD 20 A Four-wheel drive control system 16 WSH 20 A Window washer 17 WIPER 30 A Wiper and washer 18 ECU-IG No.2 7.5 A Multiplex communication system 19 TAIL 15 A Tail lights, trailer lights (tail lights), parking lights, outer foot lights 20 A/C IG 10 A Air conditioning system 21 SEAT-HTR 20 A Seat heaters 7.5 A Instrument panel lights, glove box light, ashtray, accessory meter, audio system, rear view monitor, navigation system, rear seat entertainment system, gauges and meters, air conditioning system 22 PANEL 23 ACC 7.5 A Accessory meter, audio system, rear seat entertainment system, rear view monitor, navigation system, back-up lights, trailer lights (back-up lights), multiplex communication system, power outlet, outside rear view mirror 24 BK/UP LP 10 A Back-up light, gauges and meters 25 CIG 15 A Cigarette lighter 26 POWER No.1 30 A Power windows, power back window 520 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n After a fuse is replaced l If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (→P. 522) l If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. n If there is an overload in the circuits The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged. CAUTION n To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury. l Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse. 4 l Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box. NOTICE n Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. 521 Maintenance and care l Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. This can cause extensive damage or even fire. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Light bulbs You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Toyota dealer. n Prepare a replacement light bulb. Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (→P. 617) n Front bulb locations Front turn signal/ parking lights Headlight low beam Headlight high beam Front side marker lights Front fog lights (if equipped) 522 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Rear bulb locations High mounted stoplight and cargo lamps Stop/tail and rear side marker lights Rear turn signal lights License plate lights Back-up lights Replacing light bulbs 4 n Headlight high beam 523 Maintenance and care Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. n Headlight low beam Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 524 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Front turn signal/parking lights Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 4 Maintenance and care Remove the light bulb. 525 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Front side marker lights Remove the fender liner clip. Partly remove the fender liner and turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 526 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Remove the light bulb. n Front fog lights (if equipped) Remove the bolts and partly remove the fender liner. 4 527 Maintenance and care Turn the bulb counterclockwise. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release. n Stop/tail and rear side marker lights, rear turn signal lights and back-up lights Remove the bolts and rear combination assembly. Turn the bulb bases counterclockwise. Stop/tail and rear side marker light Rear turn signal light Back-up light 528 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Remove the light bulb. Stop/tail and rear side marker light Rear turn signal light Back-up light n High mounted stoplight and cargo lamps Remove the screws and cover. 4 Maintenance and care Remove the light bulb. High mounted stoplight Cargo lamps 529 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n License plate lights Remove the screw and light unit. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. Remove the light bulb. 530 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Lights other than the above If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer. • Outer foot light (if equipped) • Side turn signal light (if equipped) n Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. l Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens. l Water has built up inside the headlight. n LED side turn signal lights The side turn signal light consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced. n Installing the fender liner clips 4 Insert the clip. Maintenance and care 531 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION n Replacing light bulbs l Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the headlights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns. l Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion. If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack. l Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens. n To prevent damage or fire Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked. 532 5-1. Essential information Emergency flashers Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an accident. Press the switch to flash all the turn signal lights. To turn them off, push the switch once again. NOTICE n To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 534 5-1. Essential information If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck. Before towing The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer before towing. l The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move. l The vehicle makes an abnormal sound. Emergency towing Type A Towing eyelet 535 5 When trouble arises If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition. 5-1. Essential information Type B Towing eyelet n Emergency towing procedure The engine switch must be in the ACC (engine off) or the ON (engine running) position. 4WD models: Put the front wheel drive control switch in 2WD. Put the shift lever in N. Release the parking brake. CAUTION n Caution while towing l Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains. l If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult. 536 5-1. Essential information NOTICE n To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission. n Emergency towing eyelet precautions l Before emergency towing, check that the eyelet is not broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not loose. l Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the eyelet. l Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady and even force. l To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead. Towing with a sling-type truck 5 When trouble arises NOTICE n To prevent body damage Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear. 537 5-1. Essential information Towing with a wheel lift-type truck from the front Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. NOTICE n To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission Never tow this vehicle wheels on the ground. Towing with a wheel lift-type truck from the rear 2WD models Turn the engine switch to the ACC position. 538 5-1. Essential information 4WD models We recommend to use a towing dolly under the front wheels. When not using a towing dolly, turn the engine switch to the ACC position, shift the shift lever to N and put the front wheel drive control switch in 2WD. NOTICE n To prevent damaging the vehicle l Do not tow the vehicle with the key removed or in the LOCK position. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel straight. l When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed. 5 Using a flat bed truck If your Toyota is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration. 539 When trouble arises Front 5-1. Essential information If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45°. Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged. Apply the parking brake firmly. 540 5-1. Essential information If you think something is wrong If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. n Visible symptoms l Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) l Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear l Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal l Voltmeter continually points higher or lower than normal (if equipped) l Engine oil pressure gauge continually points lower than normal (if equipped) l Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal (if equipped) n Audible symptoms l Changes in exhaust sound 5 l Excessive tire squeal when cornering When trouble arises l Strange noises related to the suspension system l Pinging or other noises related to the engine n Operational symptoms l Engine missing, stumbling or running rough l Appreciable loss of power l Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking l Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road l Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor 541 5-1. Essential information Fuel pump shut off system To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine. Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated. Turn the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position. Restart the engine. NOTICE n Before starting the engine Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine. 542 5-1. Essential information Event data recorder Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car crash event. In a crash or a near car crash event The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information: l Engine speed l Whether the brake pedal was applied or not l Vehicle speed l To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed l Position of the transmission shift lever 5 l Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not When trouble arises l Driver’s seat position l SRS airbag deployment data l SRS airbag system diagnostic data l Front passenger’s occupant classification The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers. 543 5-1. Essential information Disclosure of the data Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: l An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained l Officially requested by the police or other authorities l Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit l Ordered by a court of law However, if necessary Toyota will: l Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety performance l Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary l Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Toyota organization for research purposes 544 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Warning light (U.S.A.) (Canada) Warning light/Details Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)* • Low brake fluid • Malfunction in the brake system This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally. *: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: 5 Stop the vehicle immediately. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Warning light Warning light/Details Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system. 545 When trouble arises The buzzer sounds to indicate that parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]) 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light Warning light/Details *1 Low engine oil pressure warning light Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low*2. *1: Vehicles *2 without tachometer : The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must be checked using the engine oil level dipstick. Have the vehicle inspected immediately. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. Warning light Warning light/Details Malfunction indicator lamp Indicates a malfunction in: • The electronic engine control system; • The electronic throttle control system; • The electronic automatic transmission control system; or • The emission control system. SRS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The SRS airbag system; • The front passenger occupant classification system; or • The seat belt pretensioner system. (U.S.A.) (Canada) 546 ABS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The ABS; or • The brake assist system. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light and (Flashing) Warning light/Details Slip indicator and VSC OFF indicator (Flashing) The indicator comes on to indicate a malfunction in: • The VSC; • The TRAC; • The A-TRAC or • The AUTO LSD system. Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high. Follow the correction procedures. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off. Warning light (On the center panel) Correction procedure Open door warning light (warning buzzer)*1 Indicates that a door is not fully closed. Check that all doors are closed. Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2 Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt. Fasten the seat belt. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*3 Warns the right front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt. Fasten the seat belt. 5 When trouble arises (On the instrument cluster) Warning light/Details 547 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure Tire pressure warning light *4 *4 (U.S.A.) • When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure. Adjust the tire inflation pressure. • When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer. Low fuel level warning light Low level of fuel. Refuel the vehicle. Low washer fluid warning light Low level of washer fluid. Fill the tank. Engine oil replacement reminder light • Illuminates for about 3 Check the engine oil, seconds and then flashes and change if necesfor about 12 seconds: Indi- sary. cates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed. • Comes on and remains: Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. *5 548 Master warning light A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction. Check and change the engine oil. →P. 554 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency *1 : Open door warning buzzer: The buzzer sounds to indicate that any door is opened (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]) *2: Driver’s seat belt reminder: The driver’s seat belt reminder sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the ON or START position, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. *3: Front passenger’s seat belt reminder: The front passenger’s seat belt reminder sounds to alert the right front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. *4 : Vehicles without multi-information display *5: Vehicles with multi-information display n Four-wheel drive system warning buzzer The buzzer indicated that the transfer mode is not selected correctly. 5 n Key reminder buzzer n Open moon roof reminder buzzer The buzzer indicate that the moon roof is still opened (with the engine switch in the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door opened). n If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving First check the following: l Is your vehicle low on gas? If it is, refuel the vehicle immediately. l Is the fuel tank cap loose? If it is, tighten it securely. 549 When trouble arises The buzzer indicates that the key has not been removed (with the engine switch in the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door opened). 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency The light will go off after taking several driving trips. If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. n Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder If luggage or other load is placed on the right front passenger seat, depending on its weight, the reminder light to flash and buzzer to sound. n When the tire pressure warning light comes on Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light. n The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after several minutes). n When a tire is replaced with a spare tire The temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the temporary spare tire. Replace the temporary spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after several minutes. n If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) l If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters are used. l If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer. The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) l If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby. 550 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency l If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle. l If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed. l If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings. l If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.) l If tire chains are used. n If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently when the engine switch is turned to the ON position, have it checked by your Toyota dealer. n After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only) Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (→P. 483) n Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer The vehicle speed linked front passenger’s seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. (Customizable features →P. 633) CAUTION 5 n If the tire pressure warning light comes on l Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately. l If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres- sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer. l Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. n If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately. 551 When trouble arises Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION n Maintenance of the tire Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. 552 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly. NOTICE n Precaution when installing a different tire When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. 5 When trouble arises 553 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with multi-information display) If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions: Master warning light The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display. Multi-information display If any of the warning lights turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Toyota dealer. Stop the vehicle immediately. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Warning message (Flashing) Details Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high A buzzer also sounds. Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high A buzzer also sounds and the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light comes on. 554 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedures. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off. Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed. The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed. flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). Open door warning light also comes on. 5 Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged with the vehicle having reached a speed of more than 3 mph (5 km/h). A buzzer also sounds intermittently. Release the parking brake. Indicates that the washer fluid level is low. A buzzer also sounds. Add washer fluid. When trouble arises (Flashing) Make sure that all of the doors are closed. 555 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed. A buzzer also sounds. (U.S.A. only) Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the engine oil is changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil maintenance data has been reset). Check the engine oil, and change if necessary. Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. A buzzer also sounds. (U.S.A. only) Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the engine oil is changed (and the oil maintenance data has been reset). Indicates that the fuel level is low. A buzzer also sounds and the low fuel level warning light comes on. 556 Check and change the engine oil. Fill up the tank as soon as possible. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency n After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only) Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (→P. 483) 5 When trouble arises 557 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you have a flat tire Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided. n Before jacking up the vehicle l Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface. l Set the parking brake. l Shift the shift lever to P. l Stop the engine. l Turn on the emergency flashers. n Location of the spare tire n Location of the jack and tools Regular Cab models Tool bag Jack 558 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Double Cab models without storage box Tool bag Jack Double Cab models with storage box Tool bag Jack CrewMax models 5 When trouble arises Tool bag Jack 559 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Taking out the jack and tool bag (Regular Cab models) Pull the lever and fold down the seatback. Remove the cover. Unhook the strap and remove the tool bag. 560 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Unhook the strap. Loosen and remove the jack. Loosen Tighten Taking out the jack and tool bag (Double Cab models) Pull up the lever. 5 Raise the bottom cushion up. When trouble arises 561 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Vehicles with storage box Turn the knob to the OPEN direction. Remove the lid. Vehicles with storage box Remove the jack cover panel. Unhook the strap and remove the tool bag. Loosen and remove the jack. Loosen Tighten 562 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Taking out the jack and tool bag (CrewMax models) Pull the lever and fold down the seatback. Remove the cover. Unhook the strap and remove the tool bag. 5 When trouble arises 563 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Unhook the strap. Loosen and remove the jack. Loosen Tighten Assemble the jack handle (in the tool bag) Type A Assemble the jack handle extension as shown. 564 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Type B Taking out the spare tire Type A Insert the end of the jack handle extension into the lowering screw and turn it counterclockwise. After the tire is lowered completely to the ground, remove the holding bracket. 5 When trouble arises 565 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Type B 566 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Replacing a flat tire Chock the tires. Flat tire Wheel chock positions Lefthand side Behind the rear righthand side tire Righthand side Behind the rear lefthand side tire Lefthand side In front of the front right-hand side tire Righthand side In front of the front left-hand side tire Front Rear 5 567 When trouble arises Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn). 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Assemble the jack handle extension as shown. Position the jack at the correct jack point as shown. Front Front Rear Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid place. Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground. When positioning the jack under the rear axle housing, make sure the groove on the top of the jack fits with the rear axle housing. Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire. When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface. 568 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Installing the tire Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface. If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle. Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount. Replacing a steel wheel with a steel wheel Tapered portion Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel sheet. Disc wheel sheet 5 Tapered portion Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel sheet. Disc wheel sheet 569 When trouble arises Replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Lower the vehicle. Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration. Tightening torque Flat washer type (Aluminum wheels) 97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)* Taper type (Steel wheels) 154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m) * 570 : When temporarily used on spare tire/wheel, apply 154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m) 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools Remove the center wheel ornament by pushing from the reverse side. Lay down the tire with the outer side facing up, and install the holding bracket. Then secure the tire, taking care that the tire goes straight up without catching on any other part, to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking. Keep winding until three clicks are heard. Stow the tools and jack securely. n After completing the tire change The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 495) n When using the temporary spare tire As the temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the temporary spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on. 5 CAUTION Improper use of the jack may lead to death or injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack. l Do not use the jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or install- ing and removing tire chains. l Only use the jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle. l Always check that the jack is securely set to the jack point. l Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack. l Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack. 571 When trouble arises n Using the jack 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION n Using the jack l Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it. l When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. l Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. l Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle will be injured. n Using the jack handle Insert the square head securely until you hear a click to prevent the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly. n Replacing a flat tire Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury. l Retighten the wheel nuts within 100 miles (160 km) of driving. Other- wise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. l Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from under the vehicle. l Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury. l Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. l Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench as soon as possi- ble after changing wheels. Steel wheel: 154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m) Aluminum wheel: 97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m) Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury. 572 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION n Replacing a flat tire l Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving. n When using the temporary spare tire l Remember that your temporary spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your temporary spare tire on another vehicle. l Do not use two temporary spare tires simultaneously. l Replace the temporary spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possi- ble. l Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering. n Speed limit when using the temporary spare tire Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a temporary spare tire is installed on the vehicle. The temporary spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury. 5 n Driving with tire chains and the temporary spare tire l Do not fit tire chains to the temporary spare tire. 573 When trouble arises Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION n When the spare tire is attached The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly: l ABS & Brake assist l VSC l TRAC l A-TRAC l AUTO LSD l Cruise control l Navigation system Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, it may actually negatively effect the drive-train components: l 4WD system NOTICE n Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire. Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair. n When replacing the tires l When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. l Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and trans- mitters as well. n To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires. 574 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the engine will not start If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting procedure (→P. 177) or releasing the steering lock (→P. 178), confirm the following points. n The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. l There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank. Refuel the vehicle. (→P. 103) Flex-fuel vehicles: The type of fuel may be different. When refueling, add the same type of fuel, if available. After adding a different type of fuel, the engine may run roughly and driving performance may be reduced for a while when the engine is first started. In this case, wait until the engine runs normally. l The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures. l There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (→P. 108) 5 One of the following may be the cause of the problem. l The battery may be discharged. (→P. 581) l The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. 575 When trouble arises n The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency n The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. l One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected. l The battery may be discharged. (→P. 581) Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown. 576 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted. Set the parking brake. Turn the engine switch to the ACC or ON position. Depress the brake pedal. Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent. Floor shift type 5 When trouble arises 577 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Column-shift type Press the shift lock override button. The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed. Floor shift type 578 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Column-shift type 5 When trouble arises 579 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you lose your keys New genuine Toyota keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the key number stamped on your key number plate. Vehicles with engine immobilizer system, the dealer will also need the master key. (→P. 42) n If you lose all your master keys. (vehicles with engine immobilizer system) You cannot make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer system must be replaced. 580 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the vehicle battery is discharged . The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged. You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop. If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following the steps below. Connect the jumper cables. 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine 5 When trouble arises 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine 581 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration. Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle. Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the vehicle’s engine. Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected. Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. 582 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency n Starting the engine when the battery is discharged The engine cannot be started by push-starting. n Avoiding a discharged battery l Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off. l Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc. n When the battery is removed or discharged l The moon roof must be initialized. (→P. 101) l Flex-fuel vehicles: The information recorded in the computer will be cleared, which may cause the engine to run roughly and reduce driving performance for a while when the engine is first started. In this case, wait until the engine runs normally. If the vehicle is running on E85, the engine may stall. In this case, restart the engine, repeatedly if necessary. CAUTION n Avoiding battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery. l Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals. l Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery. 583 When trouble arises l Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal. 5 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION n Battery precautions The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery. l When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. l Do not lean over the battery. l In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. l Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. l Do not allow children near the battery. NOTICE n When handling jumper cables Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them. 584 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle overheats If your engine overheats: Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system. Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood. If you see steam: Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the engine. If you do not see steam: Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood. Check to see if the cooling fan is operating. If the fan is operating: Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine. If the fan is not operating: Stop the engine immediately and call your local Toyota dealer. 5 When trouble arises 585 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency The engine has cooled down sufficiently. The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates C. Check the engine coolant level. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the radiator, hoses and under the vehicle. Note that water draining from the air conditioning is normal if it has been used. Add engine coolant if required. Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. (→P. 609) Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Toyota dealer as soon as possible. 586 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency n Overheating If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating. l The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced. l Steam is coming from under the hood. l “ENGINE COOLANT HOT” is shown on the multi-information display (vehicles with multi-information display). CAUTION n To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle l If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injury such as burns. l Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is running. l Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure. n When adding engine coolant Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant. When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine. 587 When trouble arises NOTICE 5 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the vehicle becomes stuck Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P. Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire. Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires. Restart the engine. Turn off the VSC (→P. 227, 232, 233) Shift the shift lever to D or R and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle. CAUTION n When attempting to free a stuck vehicle If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution. n When shifting the shift lever Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. NOTICE n To avoid damaging the transmission and other components l Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine. l If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed. 588 6-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) Dimensions 2WD models Cab type Bed type Regular Cab Double Cab Standard Long Standard Long Overall length 209.8 in. (5330 mm) 228.7 in. (5810 mm) 228.7 in. (5810 mm) 247.6 in. (6290 mm) Overall width 79.9 in. (2030 mm) 79.9 in. (2030 mm) 79.9 in. (2030 mm) 79.9 in. (2030 mm) 75.9 in. (1930 mm)*2 75.7 in. (1925 mm)*2 75.9 in. (1930 mm)*2 75.7 in. (1925 mm)*2 75.7 in. (1925 mm)*3,*4 75.5 in. (1920 mm)*3 75.7 in. (1925 mm)*3,*4 75.5 in. (1920 mm)*3 Overall height*1 Wheelbase 126.7 in. (3220 mm) 145.6 in. (3700 mm) Front tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm) Rear tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm) *1 : Unladen vehicle *2 : P255/70R18 tires *3: *4 P275/65R18 tires : P275/55R20 tires 590 164.5 in. (4180 mm) 6-1. Specifications Cab type CrewMax Bed type Short Overall length 228.7 in. (5810 mm) Overall width 79.9 in. (2030 mm) Overall height*1 75.7 in. (1925 mm)*2 75.5 in. (1920 mm)*3,*4 Wheelbase 145.6 in. (3700 mm) Front tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm) Rear tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm) *1 : Unladen vehicle *2 : P255/70R18 tires *3: *4 P275/65R18 tires : P275/55R20 tires 6 Vehicle specifications 591 6-1. Specifications 4WD models Cab type Bed type Overall length Regular Cab Standard 209.8 in. (5330 mm) Overall width Double Cab Long Standard 228.7 in. (5810 mm) Long 247.6 in. (6290 mm) 79.9 in. (2030 mm) 76.3 in. (1940 mm)*2 76.1 in. (1935 mm)*2 76.3 in. (1940 mm)*2 76.1 in. (1935 mm)*2 76.1 in. (1935 mm)*3,*4 75.9 in. (1930 mm)*3 76.1 in. (1935 mm)*3,*4 75.9 in. (1930 mm)*3 Overall height*1 Wheelbase 126.7 in. (3220 mm) 145.6 in. (3700 mm) Front tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm) Rear tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm) *1 : Unladen vehicle *2: *3 P255/70R18 tires : P275/65R18 tires *4: 592 P275/55R20 tires 164.5 in. (4180 mm) 6-1. Specifications Cab type CrewMax Bed type Short Overall length 228.7 in. (5810 mm) Overall width 79.9 in. (2030 mm) Overall height*1 76.1 in. (1935 mm)*2 75.9 in. (1930 mm)*3,*4 Wheelbase 145.6 in. (3700 mm) Front tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm) Rear tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm) *1 : Unladen vehicle *2 : P255/70R18 tires *3: *4 P275/65R18 tires : P275/55R20 tires 6 Vehicle specifications 593 6-1. Specifications Vehicle capacity weight Regular Cab models Model code*1 Engine Driving system GSK50L-TRADKA 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine 2WD GSK51L-THADKA UCK50L-TRADKA Bed type Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants+luggage) Standard 1495 lb. (675 kg) Long 1575 lb. (710 kg) Standard 2WD UCK51L-THADKA UCK55L-TRADKA Long 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Standard 4WD UCK56L-THADKA Long USK50L-TRTDKA Standard Long 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE) engine Standard 4WD USK56L-THTDKA USK56L-THTDGA *1: *2 : *3: 594 Long 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FBE) engine 1830 lb. (830 kg) 1755 lb. (795 kg)*2 1670 lb. (755 kg) 1595 lb. (720 kg)*2 1765 lb. (800 kg) 1690 lb. (765 kg)*2 1660 lb. (750 kg) 1585 lb. (715 kg)*2 1900 lb. (860 kg)*2 2045 lb. (925 kg)*3 USK55L-TRTDKA USK55L-TRTDGA 1655 lb. (750 kg)*2 1975 lb. (895 kg) 2WD USK51L-THTDKA 1730 lb. (780 kg) Standard 4WD Long 1605 lb. (725 kg) 1530 lb. (690 kg)*2 1910 lb. (865 kg) 1835 lb. (830 kg)*2 1605 lb. (725 kg) 1530 lb. (690 kg)*2 1910 lb. (865 kg) 1835 lb. (830 kg)*2 The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) With towing package Without option 6-1. Specifications Double Cab models Model code*1 Engine Driving system Bed type Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants+luggage) GSK51L-CRASKA 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine 2WD Standard 1300 lb. (585 kg) 1415 lb. (640 kg) UCK51L-CRASKA 1340 lb. (605 kg)*2 Standard UCK51L-CRALKA UCK52L-CHASKA UCK56L-CRASKA 1450 lb. (655 kg) 2WD 1375 lb. (620 kg)*2 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Long 1305 lb. (590 kg)*2 1330 lb. (600 kg) 1255 lb. (565 kg)*2 Standard 4WD UCK56L-CRALKA 1360 lb. (615 kg) 1285 lb. (580 kg)*2 UCK57L-CHASKA Long 1220 lb. (550 kg)*2 1550 lb. (700 kg) USK51L-CRTSKA 1475 lb. (665 kg)*2 Standard USK52L-CHTSKA 1515 lb. (685 kg)*2 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE) engine Long 1470 lb. (665 kg) 1395 lb. (630 kg)*2 Standard USK56L-CRTLKA USK57L-CHTSKA 1505 lb. (680 kg) 4WD 1430 lb. (645 kg)*2 Long 6 1455 lb. (655 kg)*2 1365 lb. (615 kg)*2 595 Vehicle specifications USK56L-CRTSKA 1590 lb. (720 kg) 2WD USK51L-CRTLKA 6-1. Specifications Model code*1 Engine Driving system Bed type 1470 lb. (665 kg) USK56L-CRTSGA 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FBE) USK56L-CRTLGA engine 4WD *2 Standard 1395 lb. (630 kg)*2 1505 lb. (680 kg) 1430 lb. (645 kg)*2 USK57L-CHTSGA *1 Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants+luggage) Long 1365 lb. (615 kg)*2 : The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) : With towing package CrewMax models Model code*1 Engine Driving system Bed type Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants+luggage) 1335 lb. (605 kg) 1260 lb. (570 kg)*2 UCK51L-PSASKA 1225 lb. (555 kg)*3 2WD 1360 lb. (615 kg) 1285 lb. (580 kg)*2 UCK51L-PSALKA 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Short 1260 lb. (570 kg) 1185 lb. (535 kg)*2 UCK56L-PSASKA 4WD UCK56L-PSALKA 1250 lb. (565 kg)*3 1150 lb. (520 kg)*3 1280 lb. (580 kg) 1205 lb. (545 kg)*2 1170 lb. (530 kg)*3 596 6-1. Specifications Model code*1 Engine Driving system Bed type Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants+luggage) 1470 lb. (665 kg) 1395 lb. (630 kg)*2 USK51L-PSTSKA 1360 lb. (615 kg)*3 2WD 1530 lb. (690 kg) 1455 lb. (655 kg)*2 USK51L-PSTLKA 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE) engine 1420 lb. (640 kg)*3 1400 lb. (635 kg) 1325 lb. (600 kg)*2 USK56L-PSTSKA 4WD Short 1290 lb. (585 kg)*3 1420 lb. (640 kg) 1345 lb. (610 kg)*2 USK56L-PSTLKA 1310 lb. (590 kg)*3 1400 lb. (635 kg) 1325 lb. (600 kg)*2 USK56L-PSTSGA 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FBE) engine USK56L-PSTLGA 4WD 1290 lb. (585 kg)*3 1420 lb. (640 kg) 1345 lb. (610 kg)*2 1310 lb. (590 kg)*3 : The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) : With towing package or electric moon roof *3 : With towing package and electric moon roof 6 *1 *2 Vehicle specifications 597 6-1. Specifications Towing capacity Regular Cab models Model code*1 Engine Driving system GSK50L-TRADKA 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine 2WD GSK51L-THADKA UCK50L-TRADKA Bed type Towing capacity (Trailer weight + cargo) Standard 5100 lb. (2310 kg) Long 5000 lb. (2265 kg) Standard 2WD UCK51L-THADKA UCK55L-TRADKA Long 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Standard 4WD UCK56L-THADKA Long 7000 lb. (3175 kg)*2 8500 lb. (3855 kg)*3 6900 lb. (3125 kg)*2 8400 lb. (3810 kg)*3 6700 lb. (3035 kg)*2 8200 lb. (3715 kg)*3 6600 lb. (2990 kg)*2 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*3 8900 lb. (4035 kg)*2 USK50L-TRTDKA Standard 9900 lb. (4490 kg)*3,4 2WD USK51L-THTDKA Long 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE) engine Standard 10800 lb. (4895 kg)*3 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 9600 lb. (4350 kg)*3,4 4WD 598 8800 lb. (3990 kg)*2 8700 lb. (3945 kg)*2 USK55L-TRTDKA USK56L-THTDKA 10400 lb. (4715 kg)*3 Long 8600 lb. (3900 kg)*2 10500 lb. (4760 kg)*3 6-1. Specifications Model code*1 Engine Driving system Bed type Towing capacity (Trailer weight + cargo) 8700 lb. (3945 kg)*2 USK55L-TRTDGA USK56L-THTDGA *1 : : *3 : *4 : *2 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FBE) engine Standard 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 9600 lb. (4350 kg)*3,4 4WD Long 8600 lb. (3900 kg)*2 10500 lb. (4760 kg)*3 The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) Without towing package With towing package P275/55R20 tires 6 Vehicle specifications 599 6-1. Specifications Double Cab models Model code*1 Engine Driving system Bed type Towing capacity (Trailer weight + cargo) GSK51L-CRASKA 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine 2WD Standard 4800 lb. (2175 kg) 6700 lb. (3035 kg)*2 UCK51L-CRASKA 2WD UCK51L-CRALKA UCK52L-CHASKA UCK56L-CRASKA Standard 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Long 4WD Standard Long 600 6300 lb. (2855 kg)*2 7700 lb. (3490 kg) 8600 lb. (3900 kg)*2 2WD USK51L-CRTLKA USK57L-CHTSKA 7800 lb. (3535 kg)*3 7800 lb. (3535 kg)*3 USK51L-CRTSKA USK56L-CRTLKA 8000 lb. (3625 kg) 6400 lb. (2900 kg)*2 UCK57L-CHASKA USK56L-CRTSKA 6600 lb. (2990 kg)*2 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*3 UCK56L-CRALKA USK52L-CHTSKA 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*3 Standard 10600 lb. (4805 kg)*3 8600 lb. (3900 kg)*2 10600 lb. (4805 kg)*3 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE) engine Long 10500 lb. (4760 kg) 8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2 4WD Standard 10300 lb. (4670 kg)*3 8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2 10300 lb. (4670 kg)*3 Long 10200 lb. (4625 kg) 6-1. Specifications Model code*1 Engine Driving system Bed type 8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2 USK56L-CRTSGA 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FBE) USK56L-CRTLGA engine USK57L-CHTSGA Towing capacity (Trailer weight + cargo) 4WD Standard 10300 lb. (4670 kg)*3 8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2 10300 lb. (4670 kg)*3 Long 10200 lb. (4625 kg) The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) Without towing package *3: With towing package *1: *2: 6 Vehicle specifications 601 6-1. Specifications CrewMax models Model code*1 Engine Driving system Bed type 6500 lb. (2945 kg)*2 UCK51L-PSASKA 8000 lb. (3625 kg)*3 2WD UCK51L-PSALKA UCK56L-PSASKA 6500 lb. (2945 kg)*2 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine 8000 lb. (3625 kg)*3 6200 lb. (2810 kg)*2 7700 lb. (3490 kg)*3 4WD 6200 lb. (2810 kg)*2 UCK56L-PSALKA 7700 lb. (3490 kg)*3 8400 lb. (3810 kg)*2 USK51L-PSTSKA 2WD USK51L-PSTLKA USK56L-PSTSKA 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE) engine 8400 lb. (3810 kg)*2 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2 USK56L-PSTLKA USK56L-PSTLGA Short 10400 lb. (4715 kg)*3 10400 lb. (4715 kg)*3 4WD USK56L-PSTSGA Towing capacity (Trailer weight + cargo) 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FBE) engine 4WD 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2 10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3 The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) : Without towing package *3 : With towing package *1: *2 602 6-1. Specifications Vehicle identification n Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel. This number is also on the Certification Label. 6 Vehicle specifications 603 6-1. Specifications n Engine number The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown. 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine 604 6-1. Specifications Engine 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine Model 1GR-FE Type 6-cylinder V-type, 4-cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 3.70 × 3.74 in. (94.0 × 95.0 mm) Displacement 241.4 cu.in. (3956 cm3) Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment Valve clearance (engine cold) Intake Exhaust 0.006 ⎯ 0.010 in. (0.15 ⎯ 0.25 mm) 0.011 ⎯ 0.015 in. (0.29 ⎯ 0.39 mm) 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Model 2UZ-FE Type 8-cylinder V-type, 4-cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 3.70 × 3.31 in. (94.0 × 84.0 mm) Displacement 284.5 cu.in. (4664 cm3) Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment Valve clearance (engine cold) Intake Exhaust 0.006 ⎯ 0.010 in. (0.15 ⎯ 0.25 mm) 0.010 ⎯ 0.014 in. (0.25 ⎯ 0.35 mm) 6 Vehicle specifications 605 6-1. Specifications 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine Model 3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE Type 8-cylinder V-type, 4-cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 3.70 × 4.02 in. (94.0 × 102.0 mm) Displacement 345.6 cu.in. (5663 cm3) Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment Valve clearance (engine cold) Intake Exhaust Automatic adjustment Fuel Engine Fuel type Octane rating (Unleaded gasoline) Ethanol percentage (E85) Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 606 Gasoline engine Flex-fuel engine Unleaded gasoline only Unleaded gasoline, E85, or a blend of the two fuels 87 (Research octane number91) or higher ⎯ 85% or less 26.4 gal. (100.0 L, 22.0 lmp.gal.) 6-1. Specifications Lubrication system 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) and 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engines Oil capacity drain and refill (Reference) 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Oil grade With filter 5.5 qt. (5.2 L, 4.6 Imp.qt.) Without filter 5.2 qt. (4.9 L, 4.3 Imp. qt.) With filter 6.6 qt. (6.2 L, 5.5 Imp.qt.) Without filter 6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.) ILSAC multigrade engine oil Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity shown below. Recommended oil viscosity Outside temperature 6 Oil viscosity l The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather. l The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition. 607 Vehicle specifications *: 5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel efficiency. 6-1. Specifications 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine Oil capacity drain and refill (Reference) With filter Without filter Oil grade 7.4 qt. (7.0 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.) 6.9 qt. (6.6 L, 5.8 Imp.qt.) ILSAC multigrade engine oil Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity shown below. Recommended oil viscosity Outside temperature Oil viscosity l The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather. l The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition. 608 6-1. Specifications Cooling system Capacity 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine 10.1 qt. (9.6 L, 8.4 Imp.qt.) 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine 10.3 qt. (9.7 L, 8.5 Imp.qt.) 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine Coolant type Vehicles without towing package 12.8 qt. (12.1 L, 10.6 Imp.qt.) Vehicles with towing package 13.7 qt. (13.0 L, 11.4 Imp. qt.) Use either of the following. • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone. 6 Vehicle specifications 609 6-1. Specifications Ignition system Spark plug 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine Make DENSO NGK Gap K20HR-U11 LFR6C11 0.043 in. (1.1 mm) 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Make DENSO NGK Gap SK20R11 IFR6A11 0.043 in. (1.1 mm) 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine Make DENSO SK20HR11 Gap 0.043 in. (1.1 mm) NOTICE n Iridium-tipped spark plugs (4.7 L V8 [2UZ-FE] and 5.7 L V8 [3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE] engines) Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine. 610 6-1. Specifications Electrical system Battery Open voltage at 68°F (20°C): 12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged 12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged 11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged (Voltage checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights turned off) Charging rates 5 A max. 6 Vehicle specifications 611 6-1. Specifications Differential Front (4WD models) 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) and 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engines Oil capacity Rear 5.7L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine Oil type and viscosity 612 Regular Cab models Double Cab and CrewMax models 2.2 qt. (2.05 L, 1.8 Imp.qt.) With standard bed 4.3 qt. (4.05 L, 3.6 Imp.qt.) With long bed 4.9 qt. (4.60 L, 4.0 Imp.qt.) 4.9 qt. (4.60 L, 4.0 Imp.qt.) Regular Cab models With standard bed 3.7 qt. (3.50 L, 3.1 Imp.qt.) With long bed 3.8 qt. (3.60 L, 3.2 Imp.qt.) Double Cab models With standard bed 3.8 qt. (3.60 L, 3.2 Imp.qt.) With long bed 4.0 qt. (3.75 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.) CrewMax models 2WD models 4.0 qt. (3.75 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.) 4WD models 3.8 qt. (3.60 L, 3.2 Imp.qt.) Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT 75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” is filled in your Toyota vehicle at factory fill. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details. 6-1. Specifications Automatic transmission 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine Fluid capacity* 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Vehicles without towing package 11.1 qt. (10.5 L, 9.2 Imp.qt.) Vehicles with towing package 11.7 qt. (11.1 L, 9.8 Imp.qt.) 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine Vehicles without towing package 11.0 qt. (10.4 L, 9.2 Imp.qt.) Vehicles with towing package 11.6 qt. (11.0 L, 9.7 Imp.qt.) Fluid type *: 11.1 qt. (10.5 L, 9.2 Imp.qt.) Toyota Genuine ATF WS The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer. NOTICE n Automatic transmission fluid type Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle. 6 Transfer (4WD models) 1.2 qt. (1.12 L, 1.0 Imp.qt.) Oil type Gear oil API GL-4 or GL-5 Recommended oil viscosity SAE 75W-90 Vehicle specifications Oil capacity 613 6-1. Specifications Brakes Pedal clearance *1 4.1 in. (104 mm) Min. Pedal free play 0.04 ⎯ 0.20 in. (1 ⎯ 5 mm) Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) Parking brake pedal travel *2 6 — 9 clicks Fluid type FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 *1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf) with the engine running. *2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.1 lbf (300 N, 30.6 kgf). Chassis lubrication Propeller shafts Spider Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2 Slide yoke Molybdenum — disulfide lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2 or lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2 Steering Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm) Power steering fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III 614 6-1. Specifications Tires and wheels Type A Tire size P255/70R18 112T Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Front tires: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear tires: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare tire: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Wheel size 18 × 8J Wheel nut torque Steel wheels: 154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m) Aluminum wheels: 97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m) Type B P275/65R18 114T, P255/70R18 112T (spare tire) Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Front tires: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear tires: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare tire: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Wheel size 18 × 8J Wheel nut torque Steel wheels: 154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m) Aluminum wheels: 97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m) 6 Vehicle specifications Tire size 615 6-1. Specifications Type C Tire size P275/55R20 111H, P255/70R18 112T (spare tire) Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Front tires: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear tires: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare tire: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Wheel size 20 × 8J, 18 × 8J (spare wheel) Wheel nut torque Steel wheels: 154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m) Aluminum wheels: 97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m) 616 6-1. Specifications Light bulbs Light Bulbs Exterior Bulb No. W Type Headlights (high beam) 9005 65 A Headlights (low beam) H11 55 B Front fog lights 9145 45 C Front side marker lights 168 5 D Front turn signal/parking lights 4157NAK 28/8 E Rear turn signal lights 3157A 27/8 E Stop/tail and rear side marker lights 3157 27/8 D Back-up lights 921 18 D License plate lights 168 4.9 D High mounted stoplight and cargo lamp 921 18 D — 5 D 7065 1.4 F Front — 5 D Rear — 5 D Glove box light 74 1.2 D — 1.4 D 168 5 D Outer foot light Vanity lights Personal/interior lights Interior Foot well lighting A: B: C: D: E: F: Vehicle specifications Door courtesy lights 6 HB3 halogen bulbs H11 halogen bulbs H10 halogen bulbs Wedge base bulbs (clear) Wedge base bulbs (amber) Double end bulbs 617 6-1. Specifications Fuel information Gasoline engine Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline. Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. The use of unleaded fuel with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage. At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada. Flex-fuel engine Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline, E85, or a blend of the two fuels. Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher), E85, or a blend of these two fuels is required for optimum engine performance. The use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage. The use of fuel with an ethanol concentration in excess of 85% will have a negative impact on driving performance and can cause damage to the fuel system components. At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada. At minimum, the E85 you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D5798 in the U.S.A. n Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps. 618 6-1. Specifications n If your engine knocks l Consult your Toyota dealer. l You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern. n Fuel quality In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of fuel you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of fuel. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer. n Gasoline quality standards l Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide. l The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted. l The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance. n E85 fuel (Flex-fuel vehicles) l E85 fuel is a blend of 85% ethanol and 15% gasoline. However, E85 does not necessarily contain 85% ethanol. The ethanol content of E85 is required by ASTM to be between 70% and 85%. For example, in cold climates the ethanol content of E85 may be reduced during the winter months to maintain cold weather starting performance. l E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will need to fill your fuel tank more frequently when using E85. n Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives l Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits. l All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems. 619 6 Vehicle specifications l The number of fuel stations that sell E85 fuel is limited. For more information about fueling stations, please refer to the U.S. Department of Energy Web site. http://www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html 6-1. Specifications n Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas. Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. n Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline (Gasoline engine) l Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. l If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87. l Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol. n Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contains octane enhancing (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). additive called MMT Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service. n Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline (Flex-fuel engine) Do not use non-specified fuels such as the following. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels with more than 85% ethanol. n Toyota does not recommend the use of after-market fuel additives (Flex-fuel engine) Do not use any after-market fuel additives when repeatedly refueling with E85, as some after-market fuel additives are not compatible with E85. 620 6-1. Specifications NOTICE n Notice on fuel quality l Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged. l Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. l Gasoline engine: Do not use gasohol other than that stated here. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. l Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline. n When use of non-specified fuels (Flex-fuel engine) The use of non-specified fuels will have a negative impact on starting and driving performance, and will cause damage to the fuel system components. Therefore, do not add fuels such as the following. • Fuels containing methanol • Fuels with more than 85% ethanol n Fuel-related poor driveability If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel. n When refueling 6 Vehicle specifications Take care not to spill fuel. It can damage your vehicle’s paint. 621 6-1. Specifications Tire information Typical tire symbols Tire size (→P. 624) DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (→P. 623) Location of treadwear indicators (→P. 626) Tire ply composition and materials Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire. Uniform tire quality grading For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows. Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 627) Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 627) This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure. 622 6-1. Specifications Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a bias-ply tire. Summer tire or all season tire (→P. 497) An all season tire has M+S on the sidewall. A tire not marked M+S is a summer tire. Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN) DOT symbol* Tire Identification (TIN) Number Tire manufacturer’s identification mark Tire size code Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year *:The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. 6 Vehicle specifications 623 6-1. Specifications Tire size n Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size. Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter) n Tire dimensions Section width Tire height Wheel diameter 624 6-1. Specifications Tire section names Bead Sidewall Shoulder Tread Belt Inner liner Reinforcing rubber Carcass Rim lines Bead wires Chafer Uniform Tire Quality Grading This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.A. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. 6 n DOT quality grades For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A 625 Vehicle specifications All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. 6-1. Specifications n Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. n Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. n Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 626 6-1. Specifications Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Glossary of tire terminology Tire related term Meaning Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition Maximum inflation pressure The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire Recommended inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not) Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight 627 6 Vehicle specifications Cold tire inflation pressure 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below Production options weight The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat Rim size designation Rim diameter and width Rim type designation The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity) The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity Vehicle maximum load on the tire The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two Vehicle normal load on the tire The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing it by two 628 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead Bias ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material CT A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire 629 6 Vehicle specifications Weather side 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass Intended outboard sidewall (a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b)The outward facing sidewall of asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum permissible inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire Overall width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs Passenger car tire A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less 630 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies Pneumatic tire A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Section width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall Snow tire A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire 631 6 Vehicle specifications Ply 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially around a tire Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass Treadwear indicators(TWI) The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing *:Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle 2 through 4 2 2 in front 5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat 11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 16 through 20 7 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 632 6-2. Customization Customizable features Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Toyota dealership. Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details. Item Function Default setting Customized setting Wireless remote control ON OFF Unlocking operation Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked Wireless remote control (→P. 44) Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps ON All doors unlocked in one step OFF 0 seconds 60 seconds 30 seconds 6 120 seconds ON OFF Operation signal (Buzzer) ON OFF Panic function ON OFF Buzzer sounds when pushing LOCK with any door not closed ON OFF Vehicle specifications Operation signal (Emergency flashers) 633 6-2. Customization Item Door lock (→P. 47) Function Default setting Customized setting Speed-detecting automatic door lock function ON OFF Opening driver’s door unlocks all doors. OFF ON Shifting gears to “P” unlocks all doors. ON OFF Shifting gears to position other than “P” locks all doors. OFF ON Unlocking using a key Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps All doors unlocked in one step Open only Moon roof (→P. 99) Automatic light off system (→P. 207) 634 Door key linked operation Open and close Close only OFF Linked operation of components when door key is used Slide only Tilt only Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5 Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed 0 seconds 30 seconds 60 seconds 90 seconds 6-2. Customization Item Function Time elapsed before lights turn off Illumination (→P. 393) Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer (→P. 547) Default setting 15 seconds Customized setting 7.5 seconds 30 seconds Operation after the engine is off ON OFF Operation when the doors are unlocked ON OFF Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer ON OFF 6 Vehicle specifications 635 6-2. Customization Items to initialize The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle. Item When to initialize Reference Moon roof • After reconnecting or changing the battery • After changing a fuse P. 99 Engine oil maintenance data After changing engine oil P. 483 Tire pressure warning system • When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures. • When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc. • When changing the tire size. P. 494 636 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 638 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual. See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English. 7 For owners 639 640 Camper information This information has been prepared in accordance with regulation issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on truck-camper loading. Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. Center of gravity location The figures given in the illustration indicate the recommended center of gravity zone. Regular Cab models with standard bed Recommended location for cargo center of gravity for cargo weight rating Rear end of truck bed Regular Cab models with long bed Recommended location for cargo center of gravity for cargo weight rating Rear end of truck bed 7 For owners 641 Double Cab models with standard bed Recommended location for cargo center of gravity for cargo weight rating Rear end of truck bed Double Cab models with long bed Recommended location for cargo center of gravity for cargo weight rating Rear end of truck bed CrewMax models Recommended location for cargo center of gravity for cargo weight rating Rear end of truck bed Regular Cab models Double Cab models CrewMax models 642 42.6 in. (1082mm) 37.6 in. (955 mm) CAUTION n Loading precaution If a load is too far back, it can cause dangerous handling. If it is too far forward, the front axle may be overloaded. Cargo weight rating and proper matching When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s cargo weight rating and the camper’s center of gravity should fall within the truck’s recommended center of gravity zone when installed. Camper center of gravity Recommended center of gravity location zone 7 For owners 643 n Cargo weight rating CWR: Cargo Weight Rating Engine Drive 1GR Cab 2WD 2WD 2UZ 4WD Regular 2WD 3UR 4WD 644 C.W.R Passenger number (lb.) (kg) Standard 3 1045 474 Long 3 1125 510 Standard 3 1205 547 Long 3 1305 592 3 1145 519 3 1240 562 Standard 3 1135 515 Long 3 1450 658 Standard 3 1080 490 Long 3 1385 628 Bed Standard Long Grade – CWR: Cargo Weight Rating Engine Drive 1GR Cab 2WD Grade Passenger number (lb.) (kg) Standard SR5 6 400 181 SR5 6 440 200 Limited 5 625 284 SR5 6 405 184 SR5 6 355 161 Limited 5 535 243 SR5 6 320 145 SR5 6 575 261 Limited 5 765 347 SR5 6 555 252 SR5 6 495 225 Limited 5 680 308 SR5 6 465 211 Standard 2WD Long 2UZ Standard 4WD Double 2WD Long Standard Long 3UR 4WD C.W.R Bed Standard Long 7 For owners 645 CWR: Cargo Weight Rating Engine Drive Cab Bed 2WD 2UZ 4WD Crew Max 2WD 3UR 4WD Short C.W.R Grade Passenger number (lb.) (kg) SR5 6 325 147 Limited 5 500 227 SR5 6 250 113 Limited 5 420 191 SR5 6 460 209 Limited 5 670 304 SR5 6 390 177 Limited 5 560 254 CAUTION n Overloading Be careful — overloading can cause dangerous braking and handling problems, and can damage your vehicle and its tires. 646 Gross axle and vehicle weight ratings Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label which is located on the door latch post on the left side of the vehicle. (→P. 603) If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings. Gross axle weight rating Front GAWR Rear GAWR Gross vehicle weight rating Not exceed GVWR 7 For owners 647 n GAWR and GVWR Regular Cab models Model code∗ GSK50LTRADKA GSK51LTHADKA Engine 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine UCK50LTRADKA UCK51LTHADKA UCK55LTRADKA USK56LTHTDKA USK55LTRTDGA USK56LTHTDGA Standard 2WD Long 2WD Long 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Standard 4WD Long USK50LTRTDKA USK55LTRTDKA Bed type Standard UCK56LTHADKA USK51LTHTDKA Driving system Standard 2WD Long 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE) engine Standard 4WD Long 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FBE) 4WD engine Standard Long GAWR Front Rear 3700 lb. 3900 lb. (1675 kg) (1765 kg) 3800 lb. (1720 kg) GVWR 6200 lb. (2810 kg) 6400 lb. (2900 kg) 3950 lb. 6600 lb. (1790 kg) (2990 kg) 3900 lb. (1765 kg) 4050 lb. 6800 lb. (1835 kg) (3080 kg) 4050 lb. 6800 lb. (1835 kg) (3080 kg) 4000 lb. (1810 kg) 4150 lb. 7000 lb. (1880 kg) (3175 kg) 3950 lb. 6600 lb. (1790 kg) (2990 kg) 3900 lb. (1765 kg) 4150 lb. 7000 lb. (1880 kg) (3175 kg) 4050 lb. 6800 lb. (1835 kg) (3080 kg) 4000 lb. (1810 kg) 4150 lb. 7200 lb. (1880 kg) (3265 kg) 4050 lb. 6800 lb. (1835 kg) (3080 kg) 4000 lb. (1810 kg) 4150 lb. 7200 lb. (1880 kg) (3265 kg) ∗: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) 648 Double Cab models Model code∗ Engine Driving system Bed type GSK51LCRASKA 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine 2WD Standard UCK51LCRASKA Standard UCK51LCRALKA UCK52LCHASKA UCK56LCRASKA 2WD Long 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine Standard UCK56LCRALKA 4WD UCK57LCHASKA Long USK51LCRTSKA Standard USK51LCRTLKA USK52LCHTSKA USK56LCRTSKA USK56LCRTLKA Long 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE) engine Standard 4WD Long Front Rear GVWR 3900 lb. 3800 lb. 6400 lb. (1765 kg) (1720 kg) (2900 kg) 4000 lb. 6700 lb. (1810 kg) (3035 kg) 3900 lb. (1765 kg) 4050 lb. 6800 lb. (1835 kg) (3080 kg) 4100 lb. 6900 lb. (1855 kg) (3125 kg) 4000 lb. (1810 kg) 4150 lb. 7000 lb. (1880 kg) (3175 kg) 4100 lb. 6900 lb. 3900 lb. (1855 kg) (3125 kg) (1765 kg) 4150 lb. 7000 lb. (1880 kg) (3175 kg) 7100 lb. (3220 kg) 4000 lb. 4150 lb. (1810 kg) (1880 kg) 7200 lb. (3265 kg) 649 7 For owners USK57LCHTSKA 2WD GAWR Model code∗ Engine Driving system USK56LCRTSGA USK56LCRTLGA 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FBE) 4WD engine USK57LCHTSGA Bed type Standard GAWR Front Rear GVWR 7100 lb. (3220 kg) 4000 lb. 4150 lb. (1810 kg) (1880 kg) 7200 lb. (3265 kg) Long ∗: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) CrewMax models Model code∗ Engine UCK51LPSASKA UCK51LPSALKA UCK56LPSASKA USK56LPSTLKA 650 GAWR Front Rear GVWR 2WD 3900 lb. 4050 lb. 6800 lb. (1765 kg) (1835 kg) (3080 kg) 4WD 4000 lb. 4150 lb. 7000 lb. (1810 kg) (1880 kg) (3175 kg) Short USK51LPSTSKA USK56LPSTSKA Bed type 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine UCK56LPSALKA USK51LPSTLKA Driving system 2WD 3900 lb. (1765 kg) 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE) engine 7000 lb. (3175 kg) 4150 lb. (1880 kg) 4WD 4000 lb. (1810 kg) 7200 lb. (3265 kg) Model code∗ USK56LPSTSGA USK56LPSTLGA Engine Driving system 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FBE) 4WD engine Bed type Short GAWR Front Rear GVWR 4000 lb. 4150 lb. 7200 lb. (1810 kg) (1880 kg) (3265 kg) ∗: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 603) 7 For owners 651 652 Alphabetical index Alphabetical index A A/C.....................................276, 285 ABS ...........................................230 Accessory meter ......................204 Active traction control system ....................................230 Air conditioning filter...............507 Air conditioning system Air conditioning filter..............507 Automatic air conditioning system ................................276 Manual air conditioning system ................................285 Airbags Airbag operating conditions............................118 Airbag precautions for your child ....................................123 Airbag warning light...............546 Curtain shield airbag operating conditions............119 Curtain shield airbag precautions .........................125 Front passenger occupant classification system ...........131 General airbag precautions .........................122 Locations of airbags ..............115 Modification and disposal of airbags ............................126 Passenger airbag off switch..........................127, 146 Proper driving posture........................113, 122 Roll sensing of curtain shield airbag off switch..................129 Side airbag operating conditions............................119 Side airbag precautions ........124 SRS airbags ..........................115 Alarm.........................................110 Antenna.....................................304 Anti-lock brake system ABS warning light..................546 656 Anti-lock brake system.......... 230 Armrest ..................................... 444 Ashtray ..................................... 429 Audio input............................... 325 Audio remote controls ............ 327 Audio system A/V input adapter .................. 350 Antenna................................. 304 Audio input ............................ 325 Audio visual input.................. 350 AUX adapter ......................... 325 CD player/changer ................ 307 DVD player............................ 336 MP3/WMA disc ..................... 314 Optimal use........................... 323 Portable music player ........... 325 Radio..................................... 301 Rear seat entertainment system ................................ 329 Steering wheel audio switch.................................. 327 Type ...................................... 298 Audio visual input.................... 350 AUTO LSD system ................... 227 Automatic light control system .................................... 208 Automatic transmission Automatic transmission......... 180 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ..................... 577 TOW/HAUL switch ................ 183 AUX adapter ............................. 325 Auxiliary boxes ....................... 419 A/V input adapter ..................... 350 B Back-up lights Replacing light bulbs............. 528 Wattage................................. 617 Back window Back window ...........................96 Power back window ................97 Back window defogger............ 295 Alphabetical index Battery Charging system warning light .................................... 545 Checking .............................. 489 If the vehicle has discharged battery ............. 581 Preparing and checking before winter ...................... 246 Bluetooth® ............................... 364 Bottle holders .......................... 417 Brakes Brake system warning buzzer ........................ 228, 233 Brake system warning light .................................... 545 Fluid...................................... 486 Parking brake ....................... 186 Brake assist ............................. 230 Break-in tips ............................ 169 C Camper information ................ 641 Card holder .............................. 403 Care Exterior ................................. 460 Interior .................................. 462 Seat belts ............................. 463 Cargo capacity ........................ 244 Cargo hooks ............................ 448 Cargo lamp Replacing light bulbs ............ 529 Switch................................... 397 Wattage ................................ 617 CD changer .............................. 307 CD player ................................. 307 Certification label ............ 258, 603 Chains ...................................... 247 Child restraint system Booster seats, definition ....... 138 Booster seats, installation .... 155 Convertible seats, definition............................. 138 Convertible seats, installation .......................... 154 Front passenger occupant classification system ...........131 Infant seats, definition ...........138 Infant seats, installation.........153 Installing CRS with lower anchorages .........147, 150, 151 Installing CRS with seat belts ....................................153 Installing CRS with top tether straps........156, 158, 162 Passenger airbag off switch..........................127, 146 Child safety Airbag precautions ................122 Battery precautions .......490, 583 Child restraint system............138 Child-protectors.......................49 How your child should wear the seat belt ..........................80 Installing child restraints........144 Moon roof precautions ..........102 Power window lock switch.......95 Power window precautions .....95 Removed wireless remote control battery precautions .........................511 Seat belt extender precautions ...........................82 Seat belt precautions ..............81 Seat heater precautions ........443 Child-protectors .........................49 Cigarette lighter .......................431 Cleaning Exterior..................................460 Interior ...................................462 Seat belts ..............................463 Clock ........................................ 426 Compass...................................455 Condenser ................................486 Console box .............................401 Cooling system Engine overheating ...............585 CRS ...........................................138 657 Alphabetical index Cruise control...........................214 Cup holders ..............................414 Curtain shield airbags .............115 Customizable features.....200, 633 D Daytime running light system ....................................208 Deck hooks...............................447 Defogger Back window .........................295 Side mirrors...................293, 295 Dimension.................................590 Dinghy towing ..........................272 Display Trip information .....................198 Warning message .................554 Do-it-yourself maintenance.....471 Doors Door glasses ...........................94 Door lock ...........................44, 48 Open door warning........547, 555 Side doors ...............................47 Side mirrors.............................88 Driver’s seat belt reminder buzzer .............................547, 549 Driver’s seat belt reminder light.................547, 549 Driving Break-in tips ..........................169 Correct posture .....................113 Driving assist systems...........230 Procedures............................168 Winter driving tips..................246 Driving position memory...........68 DVD player................................336 E Emergency flashers.................534 Emergency flashers switch.....534 Emergency, in case of Blown fuse.............................512 If the engine will not start ......575 658 If the shift lever cannot be shifted ................................. 577 If the vehicle has discharged battery .............. 581 If the warning buzzer sounds ................................ 545 If the warning light turns on........................................ 545 If the warning message is displayed......................... 554 If you have a flat tire ............. 558 If you lose your keys ............. 580 If you think something is wrong .............................. 541 If your vehicle becomes stuck ................................... 588 If your vehicle needs to be towed ............................. 535 If your vehicle overheats ....... 585 Engine Compartment ........................ 476 Engine switch........................ 177 Exhaust gas ..........................174 Hood ..................................... 475 How to start the engine................................. 177 Identification number............. 604 If the engine will not start ...... 575 Ignition switch ...................... 177 Immobilizer system ............... 108 Overheating ..........................585 Warning light ......................... 546 Engine coolant Capacity ................................ 609 Checking ............................... 484 Preparing and checking before winter....................... 246 Engine coolant temperature gauge...................................... 188 Engine immobilizer system .... 108 Engine oil Capacity ................................ 607 Checking ............................... 479 Alphabetical index Preparing and checking before winter ...................... 246 Warning light ........................ 546 Engine oil maintenance data ........................................ 483 Engine switch .......................... 177 Event data recorder ................ 543 F FFV ................................... 103, 618 Flex-fuel ........................... 103, 618 Flexible fuel vehicle ........ 103, 618 Floor mat.................................. 446 Fluid Brake .................................... 486 Washer ................................. 492 Fog lights Replacing light bulbs ............ 527 Switch................................... 210 Wattage ................................ 617 Four-wheel drive system ........ 223 Front fog lights Replacing light bulbs ............ 527 Switch................................... 210 Wattage ................................ 617 Front passenger occupant classification system............ 131 Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light........................ 547 Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer.............. 547, 549 Front seats Adjustment ............................. 58 Front side marker lights Replacing light bulbs ............ 526 Switch................................... 207 Wattage ................................ 617 Front turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs ............ 525 Switch................................... 185 Wattage ................................ 617 Fuel Capacity ............................... 606 Fuel gauge ........................... 188 Fuel pump shut off system ....542 Gas station information .........672 Information ............................618 Refueling ...............................103 Type ......................................606 Warning light .........................548 Warning message .................556 Fuel door...................................103 Fuel filler door ..........................103 Fuel pump shut off system .....542 Fuses.........................................512 G Garage door opener.................450 Gas station information...........672 Gauges......................................188 Glove box..................................400 H Hands-free system (for cellular phone) ................360 Hazard lights switch ................534 Head restraints Adjusting ................................71 Headlights Replacing light bulbs .....523, 524 Switch....................................207 Wattage.................................617 High mounted stoplight Replacing ..............................529 Wattage.................................617 Heaters Seat heaters..........................442 Side mirror.....................293, 295 Hood..........................................475 Hooks Cargo net ..............................448 Deck hooks ...........................447 Shopping bag ........................448 Horn...........................................187 659 Alphabetical index I I/M test.......................................470 Identification Engine ...................................604 Tire ........................................623 Vehicle ..................................603 Ignition switch..........................177 Illuminated entry system.........393 Immobilizer system..................108 Indicator lights .........................194 Initialization Items to initialize....................636 Engine oil maintenance data.....................................483 Moon roof ..............................101 Tire pressure warning system ...............................495 Inside rear view mirror ..............85 Interior lights Interior lights..........393, 394, 395 Personal lights.......393, 394, 395 Switch....................................394 Wattage.................................617 Instrument panel light control ....................................193 Intuitive parking assist ............217 J Jack Positioning the jack ...............568 Replacing the wheel..............558 Jack handle ......................564, 568 L License plate lights Replacing light bulbs............. 530 Switch ................................... 207 Wattage................................. 617 Light bulbs Replacing .............................. 522 Wattage................................. 617 Lights Automatic light off system .....208 Cargo lamp switch ................ 397 Emergency flasher switch.................................. 534 Fog light switch ..................... 210 Hazard light switch................ 534 Headlight switch.................... 207 Instrument panel light control dial ..........................193 Interior light switch ........ 394, 395 Outer foot lights..................... 393 Personal light switch ............. 395 Replacing light bulbs............. 522 Turn signal lever ................... 185 Vanity lights........................... 425 Wattage................................. 617 Load capacity........................... 244 Lock steering column.............. 178 Luggage storage box ...... 398, 422 Luggage compartment features .................................. 447 M Maintenance K Keyless entry..............................44 Keys Engine switch ........................177 If you lose your keys .............580 Ignition switch........................177 Keyless entry...........................44 Key number.............................42 Keys ........................................42 Wireless remote control ..........44 660 Do-it-yourself maintenance ....................... 471 General maintenance............ 467 Maintenance data ................. 590 Maintenance requirements ... 465 Vehicle exterior ..................... 460 Vehicle interior ...................... 462 Malfunction indicator lamp .....546 Manual air conditioning system .................................... 285 Master warning light........ 548, 554 Map holder................................ 406 Alphabetical index Meter Accessory meter................... 204 Instrument panel light control ................................ 193 Meters .................................. 188 Mirrors Inside rear view mirror............ 85 Side mirror heaters....... 293, 295 Side mirrors ............................ 88 Vanity mirrors ....................... 425 Moon roof................................... 99 MP3 disc................................... 314 Multi-information display ................................... 198 O Odometer ................................. 188 Off-road precautions............... 236 Oil Engine oil.............................. 479 Warning light ................ 546, 548 Opener Hood..................................... 475 Outside rear view mirrors Adjusting and folding .............. 88 Outside temperature display ................................... 427 Overhead console ................... 413 Overheating, Engine ............... 585 P Parking assist.......................... 217 Parking brake .......................... 186 Parking lights Replacing light bulbs ............ 525 Switch................................... 207 Wattage ................................ 617 Passenger airbag off switch Installing the child restraint system................................ 146 Passenger airbag off switch precautions ........................ 141 Passenger airbag off switch ................................. 127 Passenger risk group ............128 Pen holder ................................409 Personal lights Switch....................................395 Wattage.................................617 Power back window...................97 Power outlet .....................432, 437 Power steering Fluid ..............................488, 614 Power windows ..........................94 R Radiator ....................................486 Radio .........................................301 Rear seat Adjustment ..............................63 Folding down...........................65 Raising the bottom cushion.....64 Rear seat entertainment system ....................................329 Rear seat entertainment system controller battery......333 Rear side marker lights Replacing light bulbs .............528 Switch....................................207 Rear seat adjustment.................63 Rear seat adjustment precautions ..............................66 Rear turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs .............528 Switch....................................185 Wattage.................................617 Rear view mirror Anti-glare...........................85, 92 Compass ...............................455 Rear window.........................96, 97 Replacing Fuses ....................................512 Light bulbs.............................522 Tires ......................................558 Wireless remote control battery.................................510 Wheels ..................................505 Rear step bumper ......................56 661 Alphabetical index Reporting safety defects for U.S.A. owners...................638 Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch.......129 S Seatback table..........................445 Seat belts Adjusting the seat belt.............75 ALR .........................................79 Automatic Locking Retractor ...............................79 Child restraint system installation...........................144 Cleaning and maintaining the seat belts ......................463 ELR .........................................79 Emergency Locking Retractor ...............................79 How to wear your seat belt......75 How your child should wear the seat belt ..........................80 Pregnant women, proper seat belt use ..............79 Reminder buzzer...........547, 549 Reminder light .......................547 Seat belt extenders .................80 Seat belt pretensioners ...........78 Seat heaters..............................442 Seating capacity.......................244 Seats Adjustment ........................58, 63 Adjustment precautions.....62, 66 Child seats/child restraint system installation ..............144 Cleaning ................................462 Folding down the rear seat .......................................65 Folding down the rear seat precaution .............................66 Folding passenger’s seat (vehicles with seatback table ......................................61 Front seat adjustment .............58 662 Front seat adjustment precautions ...........................62 Driver’s seat position memory.................................68 Head restraint .........................71 Properly sitting in the seat.....113 Raising the bottom cushion .................................64 Seat heaters..........................442 Service reminder indicators .............................. 196 Shift lever Automatic transmission......... 180 If the shift lever cannot be shifted ............................ 577 Shift lock system ..................... 577 Shopping bag hooks ............... 448 Side airbags ............................. 115 Side doors ..................................47 Side marker lights Replacing ...................... 526, 528 Switch ................................... 207 Wattage................................. 617 Side mirrors Adjusting and folding...............88 Mirror position memory ...........68 Spare tire Inflation pressure .................. 615 Replacing .............................. 567 Spare tire .............................. 558 Spark plug ................................ 610 Specifications ..........................590 Speedometer ............................ 188 SRS airbags Curtain shield airbags ........... 115 Front airbags......................... 115 Passenger airbag off switch.................................. 127 Precautions ........................... 122 Roll sensing of curtain shield airbag off switch.................. 129 Side airbags ..........................115 Alphabetical index Steering Column lock release............... 83 Steering wheel Adjustment ............................. 83 Audio switches ..................... 327 Steering wheel memory.......... 68 Telephone switches.............. 365 Stop lights Replacing light bulbs ............ 528 Wattage ................................ 617 Storage feature........................ 398 Storage precautions ............... 243 Stuck If your vehicle becomes stuck................................... 588 Sun visors................................ 424 Switch Cruise control switch ............ 214 Emergency flasher switch .... 534 Engine switch ....................... 177 Fog light switch..................... 210 Front-wheel drive control switch ................................. 223 Ignition switch....................... 177 Light switches....................... 207 Hazard light switch ............... 534 Headlights switch ................. 207 Passenger airbag off switch ................................. 127 Power back window switch..... 97 Power door lock switch........... 48 Power window switch ............. 94 Roll sensing of curtain shield airbag off switch ................. 129 Tire pressure warning reset switch ........................ 495 TOW/HAUL switch ............... 183 Turn signal lights .................. 185 VSC OFF switch... 227, 232, 233 Window lock switch ................ 95 Wiper and washer switch ..... 211 T Tachometer...............................188 Tailgate Removing the tailgate .............53 Tailgate ...................................52 Tail lights Replacing light bulbs .............528 Switch....................................207 Wattage.................................617 Talk switch................................365 Telephone switch.....................365 Theft deterrent system Alarm.....................................110 Engine immobilizer system ...108 Theft prevention labels............112 Tire inflation pressure .............501 Tire information Glossary ................................627 Size .......................................624 Tire identification number......623 Uniform tire quality grading................................625 Tires Chains ...................................247 Checking ...............................494 Identification number.............623 If you have a flat tire..............558 Inflation pressure...........501, 615 Information ............................622 Inflation pressure sensor.......495 Replacing ..............................558 Rotating tires .........................494 Size .......................................615 Snow tires .............................246 Tire pressure warning reset switch.........................495 Tire pressure warning system ........................494, 548 Warning light .........................548 Tissue pocket ...........................411 Tools .........................................558 Total load capacity...................244 TOW/HAUL switch ...................183 663 Alphabetical index Towing Bumper towing ......................261 Dinghy towing........................272 Emergency towing.................535 Fifth wheel trailer...................260 Trailer towing.........................250 Traction control........................230 TRAC .........................................230 Trip information .......................198 Trip meter .................................192 Turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs .....525, 528 Switch....................................185 Wattage.................................617 V Valet key .....................................42 Vanity lights Vanity lights...........................425 Wattage.................................617 Vanity mirrors...........................425 Vehicle identification number ...................................603 Vehicle stability control...........230 VSC............................................230 W Warning buzzers Brake system ........................545 Key reminder...................50, 549 Open door .....................547, 549 Seat belt reminder.........547, 549 Warning lights ABS .......................................546 Airbag system .......................546 Anti-lock brake system ..........546 Automatic transmission fluid temperature.................547 Brake assist system ..............546 Brake system ........................545 Charging system ...................545 Electronic engine control system ................................546 Engine oil pressure ...............546 664 Four-wheel drive system warning buzzer ................... 549 Driver’s seat belt ................... 547 Front passenger occupant classification system........... 546 Front passenger’s seat belt .............................. 547 Low brake fluid...................... 545 Low engine oil pressure ........ 546 Low fuel level ................ 548, 556 Low tire inflation pressure.............................. 548 Malfunction indicator lamp .... 546 Master warning light.............. 548 Open door ............................. 547 Pretensioners........................ 546 Seat belt reminder light ......... 547 SRS airbags..........................546 Tire pressure warning light.... 548 VSC/TRAC............................ 547 Warning messages .................. 554 Washer Checking ............................... 492 Preparing and checking before winter....................... 246 Switch ................................... 211 Washing and waxing ............... 460 Weight Cargo capacity ...................... 244 Cargo weight rating............... 644 Gross axle weight rating ....... 648 Gross vehicle weight rating... 648 Vehicle capacity weight......... 594 Towing capacity .................... 598 Load limits............................. 244 Weight........... 594, 598, 644, 648 Wheels ...................................... 505 Window glasses ............ 94, 96, 97 Window lock switch...................95 Windows Back window defogger.......... 295 Power back window ................97 Power windows .......................94 Alphabetical index Washer ................................. 211 Windshield wiper de-icer ............................ 293, 295 Windshield wipers................... 211 Wireless remote control Replacing the battery ........... 510 Wireless remote control.......... 44 Winter driving tips................... 246 WMA disc ................................. 314 665 What to do if... What to do if... A tire punctures P. 558 If you have a flat tire P. 575 If the engine will not start The engine does not start P. 108 Engine immobilizer system P. 581 If the vehicle battery is discharged The shift lever cannot be moved out P. 577 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone P. 585 If your vehicle overheats Steam can be seen coming from under the hood The key is lost P. 580 If you lose your keys The battery runs out P. 581 If the vehicle battery is discharged The doors cannot be locked P. 47 The horn begins to sound. P. 110 Alarm The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand P. 588 If the vehicle becomes stuck 666 Side doors What to do if... The warning light or indicator light comes on P. 545 If a warning light turns on n Instrument cluster Vehicles with multi-information display Vehicles without multi-information display (type A) 667 What to do if... Vehicles without multi-information display (type B) n Center panel 668 What to do if... nWarning lights Brake system warning light Master warning light P. 548 or Slip indicator* P. 545 P. 547 Charging system warning light P. 545 Tire pressure warning light P. 548 Malfunction indicator P. 546 lamp Open door warning light ABS warning light Low fuel level warning light P. 548 P. 547 or P. 546 Engine oil replacement reminder light P. 548 Driver’s seat belt reminder light P. 547 Front passenger’s seat belt P. 547 reminder light SRS warning light P. 546 *: Slip indicator comes on. Automatic transmission fluid temperature P. 547 warning light Low washer fluid P. 548 warning light Low engine oil pressure P. 546 warning light The warning message is displayed P. 554 If a warning message is displayed 669 Memo 670 Memo 671 GAS STATION INFORMATION Auxiliary catch lever P. 475 Fuel filler door P. 103 Hood lock release lever P. 475 Fuel tank capacity 26.4 gal. (100.0 L, 22.0 lmp.gal.) Fuel type P. 606 Cold tire inflation pressure P. 615 Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill) 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine With filter Without filter qt. (L, Imp.qt.) 4.8 (4.5, 4.0) 4.4 (4.2, 3.7) 4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine With filter Without filter qt. (L, Imp.qt.) 6.6 (6.2, 5.5) 6.0 (5.7, 5.0) With filter Without filter qt. (L, Imp.qt.) 7.4 (7.0, 6.2) 6.9 (6.6, 5.8) 5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine Engine oil type 672 Tire inflation pressure P. 615 P. 607 TABLE OF CONTENTS Index Moon roof ............................. 99 1 Before driving 1-5. Refueling ........................... 103 Opening the fuel tank cap.................................... 103 1-1. Key information .................. 42 Keys ..................................... 42 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors .............. 44 1-6. Theft deterrent system..... 108 Engine immobilizer system .............................. 108 Alarm .................................. 110 Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)............................. 112 Wireless remote control ....... 44 Side doors ............................ 47 Tailgate ................................ 52 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ................................. 58 Front seats ........................... Rear seats (Double Cab and CrewMax models) .............. Driving position memory system................................ Head restraints ..................... Seat belts ............................. Steering wheel (manually adjustable type).................. Steering wheel (power-adjustable type)...... Anti-glare inside rear view mirror.................................. Outside rear view mirrors ..... 1-7. Safety information ............ 113 Correct driving posture ....... SRS airbags ....................... Front passenger occupant classification system......... Child restraint systems ....... Installing child restraints ..... 58 63 68 71 75 2 113 115 131 138 144 When driving 83 2-1. Driving procedures........... 168 84 85 88 Driving the vehicle .............. Engine (ignition) switch....... Automatic transmission ...... Turn signal lever ................. Parking brake ..................... Horn.................................... 168 177 180 185 186 187 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof .......................... 94 2-2. Instrument cluster ............ 188 Power windows .................... 94 Back window ........................ 96 Power back window (CrewMax models only) ..... 97 Gauges and meters ............ 188 Indicators and warning lights ................................. 194 Multi-information display ..... 198 2 Accessory meter ................. 204 2-3. Operating the lights and wipers ...............................207 Headlight switch.................. 207 Fog light switch ................... 210 Windshield wipers and washer .............................. 211 2-4. Using other driving systems ............................214 Outside rear view mirror defoggers and front windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped on Regular Cab and Double Cab models) ............................ 293 Back window, outside rear view mirror defoggers and front windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped on CrewMax models) ............ 295 214 217 223 227 230 3-2. Using the audio system ... 298 2-5. Driving information........... 236 314 Cruise control...................... Intuitive parking assist ........ Four-wheel drive system..... AUTO LSD system.............. Driving assist systems ........ Off-road precautions ........... Cargo and luggage ............. Vehicle load limits ............... Winter driving tips ............... Trailer towing ...................... Dinghy towing ..................... 3 236 241 244 246 250 272 Interior and exterior features 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger.......276 Automatic air conditioning system .............................. 276 Manual air conditioning system .............................. 285 Audio system (without navigation system) ........... Using the radio ................... Using the CD player ........... Playing back MP3 and WMA discs ....................... Optimal use of the audio system.............................. Using the AUX adapter....... Using the steering wheel audio switches.................. 298 301 307 1 2 3 4 323 325 327 5 3-3. Using the rear audio/video system.............................. 329 Rear seat entertainment system.............................. Using the DVD player (DVD video)...................... Using the DVD player (video CD) ........................ Using the DVD player (audio CD/CD text)........... Using the DVD player (MP3 discs) ...................... Using the video mode......... Changing the Setup Menu settings............................. 6 329 336 345 347 348 350 352 3 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS Index 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone).......... 360 Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ........... Using the hands-free phone system................... Making a phone call ........... Setting a cellular phone...... Security and system setup ................................ Using the phone book ........ 3-7. Other interior features...... 424 Sun visors........................... Vanity mirrors ..................... Clock................................... Outside temperature display .............................. Ashtray ............................... Cigarette lighter .................. Power outlets (12V DC)...... Power outlets (if 115V AC equipped) ......................... Seat heaters ....................... Armrest (CrewMax models only).... Seatback table.................... Floor mat ............................ Luggage compartment features ............................ Garage door opener ........... Compass ............................ 360 364 372 377 382 386 3-5. Using the interior lights ... 393 Interior lights list ................. 393 • Personal/interior light main switch ....................... 394 • Personal/interior lights...... 395 • Cargo lamp main switch... 397 3-6. Using the storage features ............................ 398 List of storage features....... • Glove boxes ..................... • Console box ..................... • Card holder ...................... • Map holder ....................... • Pen holder........................ • Tissue pocket ................... • Overhead console ............ • Front cup holders ............. • Rear cup holders.............. • Bottle holders ................... • Auxiliary boxes ................. • Storage box...................... 4 398 400 401 403 406 409 411 413 414 416 417 419 421 4 424 425 426 427 429 431 432 437 442 444 445 446 447 450 455 Maintenance and care 4-1. Maintenance and care ...... 460 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior ........... 460 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior ............ 462 4-2. Maintenance...................... 465 Maintenance requirements .................... 465 General maintenance ......... 467 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs .......................... 470 If you have a flat tire ........... If the engine will not start.... If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P .............. If you lose your keys........... If the vehicle battery is discharged........................ If your vehicle overheats .... If the vehicle becomes stuck................................. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance.....................471 Do-it-yourself service precautions ....................... Hood ................................... Engine compartment........... Tires .................................... Tire inflation pressure ......... Wheels ................................ Air conditioning filter............ Wireless remote control battery............................... Checking and replacing fuses ................................. Light bulbs........................... 5 471 475 476 494 501 505 507 510 512 522 6 558 575 577 580 1 581 585 588 2 Vehicle specifications 3 6-1. Specifications ................... 590 Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 590 Fuel information.................. 618 Tire information .................. 622 When trouble arises 4 5-1. Essential information ....... 534 Emergency flashers ............ If your vehicle needs to be towed ........................... If you think something is wrong ................................ Fuel pump shut off system .............................. Event data recorder ............ 534 6-2. Customization................... 633 535 Customizable features........ 633 Items to initialize................. 636 541 7 542 543 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency........................545 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ........................... 545 If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with multi-information display) ............................. 554 5 For owners 6 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ................ 638 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)........................ 639 Camper information............ 641 5 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS Index Index Abbreviation list......................... 654 Alphabetical index ..................... 656 What to do if... ............................ 666 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Create Date : 2013:05:08 22:16:40-04:00 Modify Date : 2013:05:08 22:16:40-04:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26 Metadata Date : 2013:05:08 22:16:40-04:00 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:06f44fe4-bcc4-492c-abb0-a6c35e6b7cba Instance ID : uuid:e91c7696-6fd6-4e78-a449-e23799bfcca8 Page Count : 695EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools